PreSonus StudioLive 16.0.2 Mixer Manual

Technical
Information
Tutorials
Software Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
& Studio One Artist
Connecting
to a
Computer
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Controls
Hook-up
www.presonus.com
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Owner’s Manual
Overview
™
™
Troubleshooting
& Warranty
StudioLive 16.0.2
0.1 Important Safety Instructions
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended
to alert the user to the presence of important operating and
maintenance (servicing) instructions in this manual.
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within
an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user
to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous” voltage
within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient
magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to humans.
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT
REMOVE THE COVER. NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER
SERVICING TO QUALIFIED PERSONNEL.
CAUTION: To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not expose this
appliance to rain and moisture. The apparatus shall not be
exposed to dripping or splashing liquids and no object filled with liquids,
such as vases, shall be placed on the apparatus.
CAUTION: These service instructions are for use by qualified
service personnel only. To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not
perform any servicing other than that contained in the operation
instructions. Repairs must be performed by qualified service personnel.
1. Read these instructions.
2. Keep these instructions.
3. Heed all warnings.
4. Follow all instructions.
5. Do not use this apparatus near water.
6. Clean only with dry a cloth.
7. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
8. Do not install near any heat sources, such as radiators, heat registers,
stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
9. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type
plug. A polarized plug has two blades, with one wider than
the other. A grounding-type plug has two blades and a third
grounding prong. The wide blade and the third prong are provided
for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet,
consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.
10. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched,
particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and
the point where they exit from the apparatus.
11. Use only attachments/accessories specified by PreSonus.
12. Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by
the manufacturer or sold with this apparatus. When a cart is used,
use caution when moving the cart/apparatus
combination to avoid injury from tip-over.
13. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms
or when unused for long periods of time.
14. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in
any way, such as if a power-supply cord or plug is damaged; or
liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen, into the apparatus;
or if the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not
operate normally, or has been dropped. All PreSonus products in
the USA should be serviced at the PreSonus factory in Baton Rouge,
Louisiana. If your StudioLive requires a repair, contact techsupport@
presonus.com to arrange for a return-authorization number.
Customers outside the USA should contact their local distributor. Your
distributor’s contact information is available at www.presonus.com.
15. The apparatus shall be connected to a Mains power outlet
with a protective grounding/earthing connection.
16. Where the Mains plug or an appliance coupler
is used as the disconnect device, the disconnect
device shall remain readily operable.
EU Directives on the Protection of the
Environment and Other Euro Stuff
RoHS This product is compliant with the EU Directive 2002/95/EG for
the Restriction of the use of Certain Hazardous Substances in Electrical
and Electronic Equipment. No lead (Pb), cadmium (Cd), mercury (Hg),
hexavalent chromium (Cr+6), PBB or PBDE is intentionally added to
this device. Any traces of impurities of these substances contained
in the parts are below the RoHS specified threshold levels.
REACh This product is compliant with the European Union Directive
EC1907/206 for the Registration, Evaluation, Authorization, and
Restriction of chemicals (REACh) and contains none or less than 0.1% of
the chemicals listed as hazardous chemicals in the REACh regulation.
WEEE As with the disposal of all old electrical and electronic equipment,
this product is not to be treated as regular household waste. Instead
it shall be handed over to the applicable collection point for the
recycling of electrical and electronic equipment.
CE This product complies with the European
Union Council Directives and Standards relating
to electromagnetic compatibility EMC Directive
(2006/95/EC) and the Low Voltage Directive (2004/108/EC).
Summary of Capture™ Software
Features — 6
2.4
Summary of Studio One™ Artist
Software Features — 6
2.5
Summary of Virtual StudioLive
Software Features — 7
2.6
What is in the Box — 8
4.4.2 Internal FX Send Controls — 27
4.4.3 Creating Aux
and FX Mixes — 28
4.5
4.5.1 MultiMode Controls and the
Buttons that Love Them — 30
4.6
Main Output Bus — 31
4.7
Master Section — 32
4.7.1 Talkback System — 32
4.7.2 Solo Bus — 33
3.0 Hookup — 9
3.1
Rear-Panel Connections — 9
4.7.3 Monitor Bus — 34
4.8
3.3 Audio/Video Business
Conference — 13
4.1
The Fat Channel — 14
4.1.1 Select Buttons, Meters and the
Fat Channel — 15
4.1.2 What You Can Process
with the Fat Channel
and FireWire Sends — 15
4.1.3 Fat Channel: Dynamics
Processing and EQ — 15
4.1.4 Fat Channel Panning
and Stereo Link — 21
4.1.5 Fat Channel: Digital Out — 22
4.1.6 Copying, Loading, and Storing
Fat Channel Settings — 22
Digital Effects | Master Control — 36
4.8.1 The Digital FX (Effects)
Menu — 36
3.2 Basic Hookup Diagram — 12
4.0Controls — 14
MultiModes — 30
Hookup
2.3
4.4.1 Analog Aux Send Controls — 26
Controls
Summary of StudioLive 16.0.2
Hardware Features — 5
Aux Sends — 26
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
2.2
4.4
Connecting
to a
Computer
Introduction — 4
4.3.1 Input Channel Controls — 24
4.8.2 Digital Effects Library — 38
5.0 Scenes, Presets,
the System Menu,
and MIDI Control — 39
5.1
Creating and Recalling a Scene — 39
5.2
Saving and Loading
Channel Presets — 42
5.2.1 Channel Presets Library — 43
5.3
Graphic Equalizer — 44
5.4
System Menu — 46
5.5
Using MIDI Control Mode to RemoteControl StudioLive — 48
5.5.1 Recalling Scenes and FX Presets
Remotely — 48
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
2.1
Input Channel Strip — 24
Tutorials
2.0Overview — 4
4.3
Technical
Information
Getting Started: IMPORTANT
LEVEL SETTING — 1
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
4.2.1 StudioLive Metering
Controls — 23
1.0 Quick Start — 1
1.1
Metering — 23
Overview
4.2
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
StudioLive™ 16.0.2 TOC
PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
5.5.2 Using Control Change Messages
to Control Volume and FX
Assignments — 49
7.3
Using StudioLive Remote for
iPad — 78
7.3.1 Networking your iPad and
Computer — 79
Overview
5.5.3 Controlling the StudioLive 16.0.2
with a Behringer FCB1010 — 49
7.3.2 Connecting to Virtual StudioLive
and the StudioLive Mixer — 82
5.5.4 Controlling the StudioLive 16.0.2
with a Roland FC-300 — 54
7.3.2 SL Remote: Overview
Page — 83
Hookup
6.0 Connecting to
a Computer — 58
7.3.3 Aux Mix Page — 86
7.3.4 The GEQ Page — 89
6.1
System Requirements — 58
7.3.5 Channel Zoom Page — 91
Controls
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
6.2
Installation for Windows — 59
6.3
Installation for Mac OS X — 60
7.4.1 What is Capture? — 92
6.4
Using the StudioLive as an Audio
Interface — 61
7.4.2 Start Page — 93
7.4
7.3.3 The Session Page — 94
6.4.1 Using the StudioLive
with Popular Audio
Applications — 61
7.4.4 The Edit Window — 95
7.4.5 Getting Started in Capture — 96
6.4.2 FireWire Sends and
Returns — 63
7.4.6 Recording in Capture — 98
7.4.7 Editing in Capture — 99
Connecting
to a
Computer
6.4.3Using Plug-in Effects as
Inserts — 64
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
7.0
Software: Universal Control
with VSL, StudioLive
Remote for iPad®, Capture,
and Studio One Artist — 66
7.1
Universal Control — 66
7.1.1Universal Control: Launch
Window — 67
7.2
VSL: Virtual StudioLive — 69
7.2.1 VSL: Browser — 69
Tutorials
7.2.2 VSL: Overview Tab — 73
7.2.3 VSL: Channel Tab — 74
Technical
Information
7.2.4 Loading Scenes and Presets
from VSL — 74
Capture — 92
7.4.8 Capture Session
Navigation — 102
7.4.9 Mixing in Capture — 103
7.4.10Capture Key Commands — 107
7.4.11Capture Applications and
Scenarios — 109
7.5
Studio One Artist Quick Start — 113
7.5.1 Installation and
Authorization — 113
7.5.2 Enabling the Audio
Driver — 116
7.5.3Configuring Your MIDI
Devices — 116
7.5.4 Creating a New Song — 119
7.5.5 Creating Audio Tracks — 121
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
7.2.5 VSL: Setup Tab — 76
7.5.6 Creating MIDI Tracks — 122
7.2.6 Enabling Lockout Mode — 77
7.5.7 Adding Virtual Instruments
and Plug-in Effects to Your
Song — 123
7.2.7 Remote-Controlling StudioLive
with VSL — 78
7.5.8 Using Studio One to RemoteControl StudioLive 16.0.2 — 125
8.1.2Dynamic — 129
10.0Troubleshooting and Warranty — 162
8.1.3 USB Microphones and Other
Types — 129
8.1.4 Microphone Placement — 130
8.2
A Brief Tutorial on Dynamics
Processing — 133
8.2.1Common Questions Regarding
Dynamics Processing — 133
8.2.2 Types of Dynamic
Processing — 134
8.2.3 Compression Settings: Some
Starting Points — 139
8.3
Equalizers — 141
8.3.1 What is an EQ? — 141
8.3.2 Equalization Settings: How to
Find the Best and Leave the
Rest — 143
8.3.3 General EQ Suggestions — 146
8.4
Aux Bus Mixing — 149
8.4.1 Monitor Mixing — 149
8.4.2 Effects Processing — 149
8.5
Digital Effects — 151
8.5.1Reverb — 151
8.6
Level Setting Procedure in
Detail — 153
8.7
The Solo Bus — 153
8.7.1 Using the Solo Bus for
Monitoring — 154
8.7.2Destructive Soloing — 154
8.7.3Using Solo in Place (SIP) to Set Up
a Mix — 154
10.1 Troubleshooting — 162
10.2 PreSonus StudioLive 16.0.2 Limited
Warranty — 164
Index — 165
Overview
16.0.2 Block Diagram — 160
Hookup
9.2
Controls
8.1.1Condenser — 129
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Specifications — 156
Connecting
to a
Computer
9.1
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Microphone Types — 129
Tutorials
8.1
Technical
Information
9.0 Technical Information — 156
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
8.0 Tutorials — 129
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Owner’s Manual
PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
vi
Owner’s Manual
Quick Start: Level Setting
1
Quick Start 1.0
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
1.0 Quick Start
Overview
This is a map of the StudioLive 16.0.2. You’ll notice that each major section is
marked with a manual-section number where you can find more information.
CONTROLS
MULTIMODE
FireWire Returns:
*Sections 4.5.1 & 6.4.2
Solo:
*Sections 4.5.1 & 4.7.2
Mute:
*Section 4.5.1
Stereo Link:
*Section 4.1.4
* Dynamics - Section 4.3.1
* Metering - Section 4.2
* Stereo Linking - Section 4.1.4
* Copying/Saving - Section 5.2
* Dynamics Processing Tutorial - Section 8.2
* EQ Tutorial - Section 8.3
Section 4.4.2
Input Metering:
Output Metering:
Talkback
Section
4.7.1
Solo
Bus
Monitor
Bus
Sections Section
4.7.3
4.7.2 &
8.7
Multimodes and Multimode Buttons - Section 4.5
Select Buttons - Section 4.1.1
METERING CONTROLS:
Section 4.2.1
Gain Reduction Metering:
Internal FX
Level &
Assignment
Controls
Creating Monitor
Mixes:
*Sections 4.4.1,
4.4.3 & 8.4.1
Fat Channel: Section 4.1
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Creating FX Mixes:
*Sections 4.4.3
& 8.4.2
Menu Display:
* FX Menu: Section 4.8
* Scene Menu: Section 5.1
* System Menu: Section 5.4
Channel Faders - Section 4.3
Aux Faders Section 4.4
Connecting
to a
Computer
ENCODER MODES
Graphic EQ:
*Section 5.3
Hookup
Trims - For Level Setting see Sections 1.0 and 8.6
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Fader Locate:
Section 5.1
Main Output:
Section 4.6
Getting Started: IMPORTANT LEVEL SETTING
Before you begin, there are a few general rules of
thumb that we recommend you follow:
Tutorials
•• A
lways turn the Main fader and both the Monitor and Phones knobs
in the Monitor section down before making connections. Before
plugging or unplugging a microphone while other channels are
active, mute the channel to which you are connecting.
Technical
Information
•• Your faders should be set on or near the “U” mark whenever possible. The “U”
indicates unity gain, meaning the signal is neither boosted nor attenuated. If the
main output of your StudioLive is too high or too low when your faders are at or
near unity, you can use the output-level knob on the rear panel of the StudioLive
to adjust the level up or down until you have achieved the optimal volume.
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
1.1
1
1
1.1
PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
Quick Start: Level Setting
Getting Started: IMPORTANT LEVEL SETTING
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Overview
•• Do not allow your inputs to clip. Watch the level meters; when the LEDs near
the Clip mark, the top LED will illuminate, indicating that the analog-to-digital
converters are in danger of being overdriven. Overdriving the converters
will cause digital distortion, which sounds terrible. The XMAX™ preamps
in your StudioLive provide plenty of headroom; take advantage of it.
•• Your P.A. and studio equipment should be powered on in the following order:
Hookup
A. S ound sources (keyboards, direct boxes, microphones,
etc.) connected to the StudioLive inputs
B. StudioLive 16.0.2
C. Computer (if applicable)
Controls
D. Power amplifiers or powered monitors
When it’s time to power down, your system should be turned off in the reverse order.
Now that you know what not to do, let’s get some audio going!
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
1
2
2
Connecting
to a
Computer
1. Grab a microphone and a mic cable and plug them
into the StudioLive’s Channel 1 mic input.
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
2. Connect the Main Outs (TRS or XLR) of your Studio Live
to your power amplifier or powered monitors.
3. If you’re using passive speakers, connect them to your
power amplifier using speaker cable.
4. Bring down all the faders on your StudioLive to the ∞ setting. Make sure
that the Trim knob on Channel 1 is all the way counter-clockwise.
5. Plug your StudioLive into a power outlet and turn it on.
Tutorials
6. If your microphone requires phantom power, press the Select button on Channel 1
of your StudioLive and engage the 48V button.
Technical
Information
7. Turn on your amplifier or powered monitors.
8. Press the Input button in the Meter section.
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
9. Speak or sing into your microphone at about the same volume
as you will do during the upcoming performance.
2
Quick Start: Level Setting
1
Getting Started: IMPORTANT LEVEL SETTING 1.1
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Owner’s Manual
10. Turn the trim knob on Channel 1 clockwise while watching the first meter in the Fat
Channel. Adjust the Channel 1 trim knob until a little more than half of the green
LEDs are lighting up. The red LED at the top of the meter should never light up!
Overview
11. Move the Channel 1 fader up until it reaches “U” (unity gain).
12. Bring up the Main fader until you can comfortably listen
to your microphone through your speakers.
Hookup
13. With Channel 1 selected, you can use the Fat Channel
to add dynamics processing and EQ.
5
Controls
10
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
13
6
4
8
12
Connecting
to a
Computer
11
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
Technical
Information
Tutorials
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Power User Tip : Using SIP (Solo In Place) To Dial In Your Mix
Most engineers start with the drums and work from the bottom up. To begin, bring all your faders
down and raise your main fader to unity gain. Press and hold the SIP button in the Solo section until
it illuminates red. Press the Solo button, and then the Multimode button on your kick-drum mic
channel. Notice that all the other channels on your StudioLive have been muted. Bring up the fader
on the kick-drum channel and press the channel’s Select button. The Fat Channel will display the
dynamics processing, EQ, output routing, and pan settings for the kick drum. Using the encoders
and meters in the Fat Channel, set up the compressor and EQ for this channel. Once you are satisfied,
press the Solo button again. Next, press the Multimode button on the snare-mic channel and repeat
this procedure. In this way continue with each drum mic and then move on to the other instruments
that are connected to your StudioLive. When you have finished with all the instruments, lower the
main fader, press the SIP button again and slowly bring up your main fader to set up your mix.
3
2Overview
2.1Introduction
PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
2.0Overview
2.1
Introduction
Overview
Hookup
Controls
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Connecting
to a
Computer
Thank you for purchasing the PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2. PreSonus Audio
Electronics has designed the StudioLive™ utilizing high-grade components to ensure
optimum performance that will last a lifetime. Loaded with 12 high-headroom,
XMAX microphone preamplifiers; a built-in 16x16 FireWire recording and playback
engine; MIDI I/O; Fat Channel processing with 3-band EQs, compressors, limiters, and
downward expanders; DSP effects; 4 Aux buses; extensive LED metering; mix­er save/
recall; channel-strip save/recall/copy/paste; talkback; and more, StudioLive breaks
new boundaries for music performance and production. All you need is a computer
with a FireWire connection, a few microphones and cables, speakers, and your
instruments, and you are ready to record in the studio or in front of a live audience!
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Tutorials
We encourage you to contact us at 1-225-216-7887 with any questions or
comments you may have regarding your PreSonus StudioLive. PreSonus
Audio Electronics is committed to constant product improvement, and we
value your suggestions highly. We believe the best way to achieve our goal of
constant product improvement is by listening to the real experts, our valued
customers. We appreciate the support you have shown us through the purchase
of this product. We are confident that you will enjoy your StudioLive!
Technical
Information
ABOUT THIS MANUAL: We suggest that you use this manual to familiarize yourself with the
features, applications, and correct connection procedures for your StudioLive before trying to
connect it to your computer. This will help you avoid problems during installation and setup.
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
Throughout this manual you will find Power User Tips. These tips provide some innovative
mix tricks that are unique to the StudioLive. In addition to the Power User Tips, you
will find an assortment of audio tutorials at the back of this manual. These tutorials
cover everything from microphone placement to equalizer and compression-setting
suggestions and are included to help you get the most from your StudioLive mixer.
4
The StudioLive™ performance and recording digital mixer is a fully loaded,
professional digital mix­er, combined with a complete, 16x16 FireWire
Owner’s Manual
Overview2
Summary of StudioLive 16.0.2 Hardware Features 2.2
Overview
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
recording system. Racks of processing effects including compressor, limiter,
downward expander, three-band semi-parametric EQ, reverb and delay
are available on every channel, aux, and main mix, delivering total control
in a compact, rugged, steel chassis. StudioLive includes Capture™, a fully
integrated live recording software by PreSonus, allowing you to record
every performance and rehearsal with a few clicks of your mouse.
Summary of StudioLive 16.0.2 Hardware Features
•• 24-bit/48 kHz sampling rate
Controls
•• 12 Class A XMAX microphone preamplifiers
•• 16 line-level inputs
•• 4 auxiliary buses
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
•• High-definition analog-to-digital converters (118 dB dynamic range)
•• Unlimited-headroom, 32-bit floating-point, digital mixing and effects processing
•• 16x16 FireWire digital recording interface with two FireWire 400 (IEEE 1394) ports
•• Scene automation with load/save/recall of all settings
High-pass filter
••
Compressor
••
Limiter
••
Downward expander
••
3-band semi-parametric EQ
••
Pan
••
Phantom power
••
Phase reverse
••
Load/save
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
••
Connecting
to a
Computer
•• Fat Channel with:
•• 2 master DSP effects (reverb and delay with Load and Save)
Tutorials
•• MIDI control over: Scene and FX Recall, FX to Main assign,
Main Output, FX Return Level, and Tap Tempo
•• 60 mm faders
•• Military-grade quick-touch buttons
Technical
Information
•• Fast-acting LED meters
•• Talkback communication system
•• Rugged steel chassis
•• PreSonus Capture™ multitrack-recording software
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
2.2
Hookup
Intuitive, flexible, and powerful, StudioLive is a next-generation mixing
and recording tool that opens endless creative possibilities.
•• Compatible with Cubase, Digital Performer, Logic,
Nuendo, Sonar, Studio One™, and others
•• PC and Mac® compatible
5
2Overview
2.3 Summary of Capture Software Features
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
2.3
PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
Summary of Capture™ Software Features
Overview
Included with your StudioLive is Capture, a digital-audio multitracking
application designed to make recording quick and easy to set up and
operate. Perfect for live recording and for mixing your audio in real time to a
stereo audio file, Capture software was designed to interface perfectly with
StudioLive 16.0.2, allowing instant setup and recording of performances.
You can arm all 16 tracks to record with the click of a single button.
Please consult the Capture user manual for complete instructions.
Hookup
•• 16x16 multitrack recording application
•• Record with two mouse clicks
•• Essential editing suite (Copy, Cut, Paste, Splice, Resize)
Controls
•• Peak LED-style meter bridge with clip indicators
•• Marker placement and recall
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
•• Export between marker
•• Record stereo mix from StudioLive mixer
•• Import/export .wav, .aiff, or OpenTL files
2.4
Summary of Studio One™ Artist Software Features
Connecting
to a
Computer
All PreSonus audio interfaces include PreSonus Studio One Artist recording
software, which comes with over 4 GB of plug-ins, loops, and samples, giving
you everything you need for music recording and production. The Studio
One Artist Quick Start Guide is located in Section 4.1 of this manual. You will
find a complete user manual on the Studio One Artist installation DVD.
•• Unlimited track count, inserts, and sends
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
•• 2
0 high-quality native plug-ins: amp modeling (Ampire), delay (Analog Delay,
Beat Delay), distortions (Redlight Dist), dynamics processing (Channel Strip,
Compressor, Gate, Expander, Limiter, Tricomp), equalizer (Channel Strip, Pro EQ),
modulation (Autofilter, Chorus, Flange, Phaser, X-Trem), reverb (MixVerb, Room
Reverb), and utility (Binaural Pan, Mixtool, Phase Meter, Spectrum Meter, Tuner)
•• O
ver 4 GB of loops, samples, and instruments, featuring: Presence
virtual sample player, Impact virtual drum machine, SampleOne virtual
sampler, Mojito virtual analog-modeled subtractive synthesizer
Tutorials
•• Innovative and intuitive MIDI mapping
•• Powerful drag-and-drop functionality for faster workflow
•• Mac OS X® and Windows® compatible
Technical
Information
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
6
Summary of Virtual StudioLive Software Features
The Virtual StudioLive application is completely integrated with your StudioLive
16.0.2. VSL is a highly advanced editor/librarian and control panel. Because of the
continuous bidirectional communication between your StudioLive and VSL, whatever
you do on the StudioLive‘s control surface will be reflected in VSL and vice versa.
•• Easy drag-and-drop workflow
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Overview2
Summary of Virtual StudioLive Software Features 2.5
•• Drag presets directly to channels
Hookup
•• Drag parts of presets directly to components in the Fat Channel
•• Adjust the Fat Channel gate, compressor, and EQ and the graphic EQ and effects
Controls
•• Quickly drop entire Scenes to the mixer for instant recall
of all channel, effects, and graphic EQ settings
•• Load effects quickly by simply dragging presets into the user interface
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
•• Makes StudioLive as easy to use as Studio One
•• Remote controllable with an Apple iPad™ running PreSonus SL Remote™
•• Use the mouse to quickly assign channels to multiple buses, mute, solo, etc.
•• Timestamped backups of the entire board
Store and organize presets on your computer, then
transfer them to your mixer for that night’s gig
••
Create presets on the road, store them to the mixer, then drag them to
your preset pool the next time you’re connected to the computer
••
Reorder presets in mixer memory: easily order presets
to best fit your workflow for the gig
••
Share presets with friends: drag presets out of the browser and
email, IM, or disk-swap presets with other StudioLive owners
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
••
Connecting
to a
Computer
•• Preset Management
See all of the most-used mixer parameters at once
••
See the state of all Fat Channel settings at once
••
See all Aux mixes at once
••
See the current effects and parameter settings
••
See graphic equalizer settings
Technical
Information
••
Tutorials
•• Mixer Overview
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
2.5
Overview
Owner’s Manual
7
PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
2Overview
2.6 What is in the Box
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
2.6
What is in the Box
In addition to this manual, your StudioLive package contains the following:
Overview
PreSonus StudioLive 16.0.2 digital recording and performance mixer
Hookup
Controls
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Connecting
to a
Computer
6’ (1.8m) 6-pin to 6-pin FireWire 400 cable
6’ (1.8m) 6-pin to 9-pin FireWire 400 - FireWire 800 cable
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
IEC power cord
Tutorials
StudioLive Software Library containing
•• PreSonus StudioLive Artist program DVD plus gigabytes of third-party content
•• PreSonus Capture CD with demo Sessions
Technical
Information
•• PreSonus Virtual StudioLive and Universal Control CD
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
8
Owner’s Manual
Hook-up3
Rear-Panel Connections 3.1
Hookup
Overview
Rear-Panel Connections
XLR connector wiring for phantom power:
Pin 1 = GND
Pin 2 = +48V
Pin 3 = +48V
Line-level Input. Each channel of the StudioLive has a 1/4-inch, balanced TRS
connection for line-level input. When these inputs are engaged, the microphonepreamp circuit is bypassed. Typical examples of line-level connections are synthesizer
outputs, CD/DVD-player outputs, and (with exceptions) signal-processor outputs.
Please note: As with any mixer, plugging in a microphone or a line-level input device, or
turning phantom power on or off, will create a momentary spike in the audio output of your
StudioLive. Because of this, it is highly recommended that you mute or turn down the channel
trim before changing connections or turning phantom power on or off. This simple step will add years
to the life of your audio equipment.
Connecting
to a
Computer
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
WARNING: Phantom power is only required for condenser micro­phones and
can severely damage dynamic mics, especially ribbon mics. Therefore, switch
phantom power off for all channels where it is not required.
Tutorials
48-volt Phantom Power. The StudioLive provides 48V phantom power for the
microphone input on each channel. This feature can be individually enabled for each
channel using buttons on the top panel.
Technical
Information
Microphone Inputs. Your StudioLive is equipped with 12 PreSonus XMAX
microphone preamplifiers for use with all types of microphones. The XMAX
preamplifier has a Class A input buffer, followed by a dual-servo gain stage. This
arrangement results in ultra-low noise and wide gain control, allowing you to boost
signals without increasing unwanted background noise.
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Controls
100 - 240 VAC 50-60Hz
On
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
3.1
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
3.0Hookup
9
3Hook-up
3.1 Rear-Panel Connections
PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Overview
Stereo Inputs. Channels 9 through 16 are stereo inputs. Each pair of channels in
controlled by a single fader, solo, mute, and select button. By default Channels 9/10
through 15/16 are set to be mono, so that only the mic preamplifier or the Left
(mono) input will be heard. When these channels are unlinked, the Right input is not
accessible on the mixer. To insert the Right input into your mix, you must engage
Stereo Link (see Section 4.1.4 for details).
Hookup
Channels 13/14 and 15/16 have unbalanced RCA connections, in addition
to the balanced TRS connections. Like the TRS connections, the right RCA
input will not be accessible on the mixer if the channels are not linked.
Controls
Aux Outputs. The StudioLive is equipped with four
auxiliary outputs. In Section 8.4, you’ll find a tutorial
on creating aux mixes for monitoring and effects. Aux
mixes are routed to these outputs.
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Talkback Mic Input. The StudioLive does not have an onboard talkback mic so an
external mic must be used. Phantom power is always enabled on this microphone
preamp, so you can use either a dynamic or a condenser microphone.
Warning: Phantom power is only required for condenser microphones and can severely
damage dynamic mics, especially ribbon mics. We recommend that you consult the
documentation that came with your microphone to confirm that it is safe to use with
phantom power before connecting a dynamic microphone to the Talkback input.
Talkback Mic Trim. This is the trim control for your talkback
microphone. It adjusts the gain of the talkback input.
Connecting
to a
Computer
Mono Output. This balanced output carries a mono, summed version of
the stereo signal from the main bus.
Mono Output Trim. This knob controls the maximum
level of the Mono Output signal. The signal can be
attenuated to -80 dB and boosted up to +6 dB
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Main Output. The StudioLive features both XLR and TRS main outputs.
These outputs are parallel to each other and to the mono output.
Power User Tip: All the main outputs (XLR Stereo, TRS Stereo, and XLR
Mono) of the StudioLive are active all the time. Because of this, you
can send your main mix to five speakers at the same time. This can
be especially useful when you need to send a mix to another room or
add another set of speakers to accommodate a larger venue.
Tutorials
Main Output Trim. This knob controls the maximum
output level of the XLR and TRS main outputs. The signal
can be attenuated to -40 dB and boosted up to 0 dB.
Technical
Information
Monitor Output. These are the balanced control-room outputs. The level is
controlled by the Monitor knob in the Monitor section on the top panel.
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
10
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Hook-up3
Rear-Panel Connections 3.1
Overview
MIDI I/O. MIDI stands for “Musical Instrument Digital Interface.” However, the MIDI
standard goes well beyond just instruments and sequencing. The MIDI inputs and
outputs allow connection and/or communication with external MIDI equipment.
One function of these ports is MIDI sequencing. The MIDI input can also be used to
connect a MIDI footpedal to control different parameters on your StudioLive. More
information about MIDI Control Mode can be found in Section 5.5.
Hookup
NOTE: MIDI is not audio but is frequently used to trigger or control an audio source (such
as a plug-in or synthesizer). When using MIDI, ensure that your MIDI data is correctly
sent and received by the appropriate hardware or software instruments. You may
also need to return those devices’ audio to a StudioLive input channel. Please consult
the User’s Manual of your MIDI devices for help with MIDI setup and usage.
ireWire Ports. There are two standard 6-pin FireWire 400 ports on the back of the
F
StudioLive. Either port can be used to connect the StudioLive to a FireWire port on
your computer. If your computer has a 4-pin connector (commonly found on
laptops), you will need to purchase a 4-to-6-pin adapter or cable. These adapters and
cables can be found at your local computer-supply store. The FireWire 400 ports are
compatible with FireWire 800 connections found on Apple computers. A FW400FW400 and a FW800-FW400 cable have been included for your convenience. You can
use the second FireWire port to connect additional FireWire devices (such as external
hard drives) to your computer or to daisy-chain a PreSonus FireStudio-family
interface for additional recording inputs.
Connecting
to a
Computer
2 Amp Fuse. This is the StudioLive’s fuse housing. Your StudioLive uses a 5 mm x 20
mm, 250 VAC, fast-acting fuse.
Controls
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Owner’s Manual
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Power-Input. This is where you plug in the provided IEC power cable.
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
Technical
Information
Tutorials
ower Switch. Push the top part of the switch ( | ) to turn on your StudioLive. Push
P
the bottom part of the switch ( O ) to turn it off.
11
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Overview
Hookup
Controls
On
100 - 240 VAC 50-60Hz
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Connecting
to a
Computer
Front-of-House Speakers
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Tutorials
Technical
Information
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
12
Drum Set
Bass Guitar
Rhythm Guitar and Amp
Keyboard
Monitors
MIDI Pedal
Laptop
Basic Hookup Diagram
3.2
PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
3Hook-up
3.2 Basic Hookup Diagram
Lead Vocal Mic
DVD player
iPod
Laptop
Tutorials
Powered Speakers
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Connecting
to a
Computer
Controls
Hookup
Wireless Microphones
and Receivers
Overview
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Audio/Video Business Conference
Assisted-Listening
Transmitter
On
100 - 240 VAC 50-60Hz
13
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Microphones
Technical
Information
3.3
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
Owner’s Manual
Hook-up3
Audio/Video Business Conference 3.3
PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
4Controls
4.1 The Fat Channel
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
4.0Controls
4.1
The Fat Channel
Overview
Hookup
Controls
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Connecting
to a
Computer
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
The heart of the StudioLive is the revolutionary Fat Channel. The Fat Channel
makes dynamics, routing, and panning for every input and output on the
StudioLive available at the touch of a Select button. The 12 multipurpose
knobs and meters located in the Fat Channel control nearly every adjustment
you will need to make on your StudioLive. From the Fat Channel, you can:
•• Add dynamics processing and EQ to every input and output
•• Create sends and effects mixes for all four analog Aux
sends and both internal effects buses
•• Engage phantom power for each mic preamp.
•• Meter inputs, Aux and Main outputs, and gain reduction for all 16 channels
Tutorials
•• Copy, save, and load Fat Channel and GEQ presets
•• Recall your fader position for stored mixes
Technical
Information
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
14
Select Buttons, Meters and the Fat Channel
Select Buttons. All around the StudioLive, you will see Select buttons. There is a
Select button on each of the 12 channels, each of the 4 analog aux sends, both of the
internal effects buses, and the Main output bus. Each of these buttons serves exactly
the same purpose: to access the Fat Channel parameters for its channel or bus.
Selected Channel Display. In the lower right corner of the Fat Channel, you will find
an LED readout. The currently selected channel will always be displayed here.
(Numbers 1-8 indicate one of the 8 mono input channels is selected; 9, 11, 13, or 15
indicate that one of the 4 stereo input channels is selected; MA indicates the Main
bus; A1-A4 indicates Aux 1-4; and Fa and Fb indicate EFX A and EFX B.)
What You Can Process with the Fat Channel and FireWire Sends
Controls
4.1.2
The following table provides a quick guide to the processing
that is available for each bus in the StudioLive:
Phase
Reverse
High-Pass
Filter
Noise Gate
Compressor
EQ
Limiter
FireWire
Send
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Bus
Inputs (Ch 1-16)
Main Out L/R
Aux Sends 1-4
Connecting
to a
Computer
Internal FX Sends A and B
Fat Channel: Dynamics Processing and EQ
Technical
Information
Tutorials
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
The main function of the Fat Channel is to provide dynamics processing and
filtering for every input and output on the StudioLive. The rotary encoders work
in conjunction with the meters directly above them to adjust the dynamics
processing and EQ. The Fat Channel’s processing section consists of five parts:
High-Pass filter, Noise Gate, Compressor, Limiter, and parametric EQ. Each can
be turned on or off and controlled separately. The signal flows as follows:
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
4.1.3
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Controls4
The Fat Channel 4.1
Overview
4.1.1
Hookup
Owner’s Manual
15
PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
4Controls
4.1 The Fat Channel
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Phase Reverse
Button
Reverses the Phase of the Selected
Channel.
High Pass
Filter
Overview
Push this button to invert the
phase of the selected channel’s
signal (that is, to alter the phase by
180°). The button will illuminate,
indicating that Phase Reverse is
active. The Phase Reverse button
can be used to correct audio
signals that are out of phase and
cancelling/reinforcing each other.
The High Pass Filter section
consists of an encoder and a meter.
You will notice that the there is a
frequency range to the left of the
meter. The high-pass filter’s cutoff
frequency can be set from 24 Hz to
1 kHz.
Hookup
Remember that all frequencies
below a high-pass filter’s cutoff
frequency are attenuated. See
Section 8.3.1 for more details.
Phase reverse is only available on the 16
channels of the input bus.
Controls
48V Button
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Connecting
to a
Computer
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Phantom power is only available on the 12
microphone preamps of the input bus.
High Pass
Filter On/Off
Turns the High Pass Filter On and Off
for the Selected Channel or Output
Bus.
Tutorials
This button engages or disengages
the high-pass filter for the selected
channel or output bus. It will
illuminate to indicate that the
compressor has been enabled.
Technical
Information
The high-pass filter is available on the 16
channels of the input bus, the 4 Auxes, and
both internal FX buses.
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
16
The slope of the High Pass Filter is
-6 dB/octave.
Engages Phantom Power in the
Microphone Preamp of the Selected
Channel.
Push this button to engage
phantom power in the selected
channel’s microphone preamp. The
button will illuminate, indicating
that phantom power is active.
Phantom power transmits 48V of
DC electric power through a
microphone cable. Most
commonly it is used to power
condenser microphones, although
some direct boxes also take
advantage of it. For more
information on microphones,
please consult the microphone
tutorial in Section 8.1.
Adjusts the High Pass Filter’s Cut-off
Frequency.
Gate On/Off But- Turns the Gate On and Off for the
ton
Selected Channel.
This button engages and
disengages the gate for the
selected channel. It will illuminate
to indicate that the gate has been
enabled.
The gate is available for all
input and output buses.
Gate
Threshold
Sets and Displays the Threshold of the
Gate for the Selected Channel.
This encoder sets, and the meter
displays, the gate thresh­old for the
selected channel. The threshold
determines the level at which the
gate will open. Essentially, all
signals above the threshold setting
are passed through unaffected.
You can set the threshold from 0 to
-56 dB.
Enables Automatic Response Mode
When Auto mode is active, the
Response control becomes
inoperative, and a preprogrammed attack and release
curve is used. In this mode, the
attack is set to 10 ms, and the
release is set to 150 ms. All other
compressor parameters can still be
adjusted manually.
Compressor
Threshold
Sets and Displays the Threshold of the
Compressor for the Selected Channel
or Output Bus.
This encoder sets, and the meter
displays, the compressor threshold
for the selected channel or output
bus. When the signal’s amplitude
(level) exceeds the threshold
setting, the compressor engages.
Turning the knob counterclockwise
lowers the threshold so that
compression begins at a lower
amplitude. The threshold can be
set from -56 to 0 dB.
Compressor
Response
Sets and Displays the Compressor
Attack Setting for the Selected Input
Channel or Output Bus.
This encoder sets, and the meter
displays, the compressor’s
response setting for the selected
channel or output bus. The
Response control sets the attack
and release tapers for the
Compressor simultaneously. A
tight response time triggers the
compressor immediately and
returns the gain reduction back to
zero quickly when the signal drops
below the compressor threshold.
A smooth response time allows the
beginning component of the
signal or “initial transient” to pass
through, uncompressed and
extends the time of length of time
before the gain reduction returns
to zero.
Power User Tip: In general, a tighter response
time should be used for instruments with
relatively few transients, like drums and
percussion, while a smooth setting should be
using for instrument with a lot of transients,
like vocals and strings.
17
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Overview
Hookup
Auto Mode
Button
Controls
The compressor is available for all input and
output buses.
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
This encoder sets, and the meter
displays, the com­pression ratio (or
slope) for the selected channel or
output bus. The ratio sets the
compression slope, which is a
function of the output level versus
the input level. For example, if you
have the ratio set to 2:1, any signal
levels above the threshold setting
will be compressed at a ratio of 2:1.
This means that for every 2 dB of
level increase above the threshold,
the compressor’s output will only
increase 1 dB. The ratio can be set
from 1:1 to 14:1.
Connecting
to a
Computer
This button engages or disengages
the compressor for the selected
channel or output bus. It will
illuminate to indicate that the
compressor has been enabled.
Sets and Displays the Compression
Ratio for the Selected Input Channel
or Output Bus.
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Compression
Ratio
Tutorials
Turns the Compressor On and Off for
the Selected Channel or Output Bus.
Controls4
The Fat Channel 4.1
Technical
Information
Compressor
On/Off
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
Owner’s Manual
PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
4Controls
4.1 The Fat Channel
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Compressor
Makeup Gain
Sets and Displays the Amount of
Makeup Gain for the Compressor on
the Selected Input Channel or
Output Bus.
Low EQ
Frequency
Control
This encoder sets, and the meter
displays, the center frequency of
the equalizer’s Low band. The
center frequency is the middle of
the passband (the mean) between
the lower and upper cutoff
frequencies that define the limits
of the band.
Overview
This encoder sets, and the meter
displays, the makeup-gain setting
of the compressor for the selected
channel or output bus. When
compressing a signal, gain
reduction usually results in an
overall attenuation of level. The
gain control allows you to restore
this loss in level and readjust the
volume to the precompression
level (if desired). You can adjust
Makeup Gain from 0 dB (no gain
adjustment) to +28 dB.
Hookup
Controls
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Limiter
On/Off
Turns on the Limiter for the Selected
Input Channel or Output Bus.
Connecting
to a
Computer
When the limiter is engaged the
button will illuminate. The
threshold for the limiter is set to 0
dBFS. The Ratio is ∞:1.
The limiter is available for all input and
output buses.
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Low EQ On/Off
Button
Activates Control for the Low Band EQ
for the Selected Input or Output Bus.
This button actives control of the
equalizer’s Low band for the
selected channel or bus. The
button will illuminate to indicate
control is active.
Tutorials
The Low EQ band is available for all input and
output buses.
Technical
Information
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
18
Sets and Displays the Center
Frequency of the Low EQ Band.
You can adjust the center
frequency from 36 to 465 Hz.
Low EQ Gain
Control
Sets and Displays the Gain Attenuation
or Boost of the Center Frequency.
This encoder sets, and the meter
displays, the gain cut or boost at
the center frequency for the Low
band. The level of the center
frequency can be set between -15
and +15 dB.
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
When the Shelf button is not
engaged, the Low band is semiparametric. Enabling the Shelf
button turns the Low band into a
low-shelving EQ that alters, by a
fixed amount, a band of low
frequencies at and below a
user-selected shelving frequency.
Sets and Displays the Gain
Attenuation or Boost of the Center
Frequency for the Mid Band.
Hookup
This encoder sets, and the meter
displays, the Gain cut or boost at
the center frequency of the Mid
band. The level of the center
frequency can be set between -15
and +15 dB.
Mid HiQ
Button
Q is the ratio of the EQ band’s
center frequency to its bandwidth.
With a constant center frequency,
higher Q values indicate a
narrower bandwidth, so Q is often
equated with bandwidth. By
default, the Q is set to a value of
0.55. When the Hi Q button is
engaged, the Q setting will be
increased to 2.0, thus narrowing
the bandwidth to provide more
precise control.
The Mid EQ band is available for all input and
output buses.
Mid EQ
Frequency
Control
Enables a Narrow Bandwidth for the
Mid Band EQ on the Selected Input or
Output bus.
Sets and Displays the Center
Frequency of the Mid EQ.
This encoder sets, and the meter
displays, the center frequency for
the Mid band. You can adjust the
center frequency from 260 Hz to
3.5 kHz.
High EQ On/Off
Button
Activates Control for the High EQ for
the Selected Input or Output Bus.
This button actives control of the
High band for the selected channel
or bus. The button will illuminate
to indicate control is active.
The High EQ band is available for all input and
output buses.
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
This button actives the controls for
the equalizer’s Mid band for the
selected input or output. The
button will illuminate to indicate
control is active.
Connecting
to a
Computer
Activates Controls for the Mid EQ for
the Selected Input or Output Bus.
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Controls
A low shelving EQ is like a
bass-control knob on a stereo.
In this mode, the Center
Frequency control selects
the shelving frequency.
Mid EQ On/Off
Button
Overview
Mid EQ Gain
Control
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Turns on the Low Shelving EQ for the
Selected Input or Output Bus.
Controls4
The Fat Channel 4.1
Tutorials
Low Shelf EQ
Button
Technical
Information
Owner’s Manual
19
PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
4Controls
4.1 The Fat Channel
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
High EQ
Frequency
Control
Sets and Displays the Center
Frequency of the High EQ.
Overview
This encoder sets, and the meter
displays, the center frequency of
the High band. You can adjust the
center frequency from 1.4 to 18
kHz.
High Shelving
EQ Button
Turns on the High Shelving EQ for the
Selected Input or Output Bus.
Hookup
When the Shelf button is not
engaged, the High band is a
semi-parametric EQ. Enabling the
Shelf button turns the High band
into a high shelving EQ that alters,
by a fixed amount, a band of high
frequencies at and above a
user-selected shelving frequency.
Controls
A high shelving EQ is like
a treble-control knob on a
stereo. In this mode, the Center
Frequency control selects
the shelving frequency.
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
High EQ Gain
Control
Sets and Displays the Gain Attenuation
or Boost at the Center Frequency of
the High EQ Band.
Connecting
to a
Computer
This encoder sets, and the meter
displays, the gain cut or boost at
the center frequency of the High
EQ band. The level of the center
frequency can be set between -15
and +15 dB.
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Tutorials
Technical
Information
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
20
The Pan control for each input or output bus is set on
the Fat Channel. The LED display shows the pan
setting, and the encoder to the right of the display
controls panning for the selected input or output bus.
When two channels are linked as stereo pair, the LED
display will automatically change to a stereo pan.
Stereo linking is also done from within the Fat Channel. Input channels and aux buses
can be linked to create a stereo pair. The stereo pairs are predefined and cannot be
changed. They are as follows:
Channels 11 and 12
Channels 13 and 14
Channels 15 and 16
Aux 1 and Aux 2
Aux 3 and Aux 4
Controls
Channels 1 and 2
Channels 3 and 4
Channels 5 and 6
Channels 7 and 8
Channels 9 and 10
Overview
Fat Channel Panning and Stereo Link
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Controls4
The Fat Channel 4.1
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
For mono channels and Aux buses, a stereo link can be enabled when either
channel in the pair is selected. When the Stereo Link button is illuminated,
all dynamics settings, subgroup assignments, and main assignments
are nondestructively pasted to the other channel in the pair.
Connecting
to a
Computer
POWER USER TIP: Because this is a nondestructive paste; when the Link button is
disengaged, the other channel‘s previous settings will be restored. For instance, if Channel
8 is selected when the Stereo Link button is engaged, all of Channel 8’s settings will be
copied onto Channel 7. If Channel 7 is selected when the Stereo Link button is engaged,
Channel 7’s settings will be copied onto Channel 8. Because the settings are copied
nondestructively, it is possible to A/B dynamics settings with the touch of two buttons.
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Whichever channel is selected when the Link button is engaged will be
the Link Master. When either channel in the stereo link is selected, both
channels‘ Select buttons will illuminate but the Link Master‘s ID number will
be displayed in the Selected Channel LED read-out in the Fat Channel.
On the StudioLive 16.0.2’s four stereo channels, the stereo link will enable the
right side (channels 10, 12, 14, and 16) to be heard in your mix. Each channel’s
fader, Select button, and Multimode button, and each Aux Mix send, controls both
channels at the same time. All Fat Channel settings are applied to both channels.
Technical
Information
Tutorials
It should be noted that while Stereo Link must be enabled in order to
hear the right side of each stereo channel through the StudioLive, the
right inputs are still sent through the FireWire bus and can be recorded by
your DAW with or without Stereo Link engaged. For more information on
using your StudioLive as an audio interface, please consult Section 6.
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
4.1.4
Hookup
Owner’s Manual
21
PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
4Controls
4.1 The Fat Channel
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
4.1.5
Fat Channel: Digital Out
Overview
The Fat Channel gives you the option of sending unprocessed audio to your
computer or sending the processed signal. When the Dig Out button is enabled, the
signal being sent to the FireWire bus is post-EQ and post-dynamics processing; the
button will illuminate to indicate this signal flow. When the button is disabled, the
signal being sent to the FireWire bus is pre-Fat Channel.
Hookup
The Dig Out button is only available when one of the channel inputs is
selected. The Main output and Aux bus automatically send their signals
post-Fat Channel dynamics and EQ. All FireWire sends are pre-fader
except for the Aux and Main outputs. For more information on using
your StudioLive as an audio interface, please consult Section 6.
Controls
4.1.6
Copying, Loading, and Storing Fat Channel Settings
Every setting in the Fat Channel can be copied from one channel to another
and can be saved and stored as a user preset that you can recall later.
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Press the Copy button to copy the settings on the selected channel or bus. Every
Select button on the StudioLive except the button for the currently selected channel
will begin to flash. The Select button for the selected channel will not illuminate. You
can copy a Fat Channel setting from any channel or bus to any combination of
channels and buses.
The Load button will also start to flash.
Connecting
to a
Computer
To paste the current channel’s Fat Channel setting to another channel or
bus, simply press that channel’s Select button. It will stop flashing and will
illuminate. After you have selected every channel to which you want the settings
pasted, press the Load button. The StudioLive will return to its normal state,
indicating that the Fat Channel settings have been successfully pasted.
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
The Load button can also be used to recall saved settings and
presets. For complete recall instructions, see Section 5.2.
You can save your Fat Channel settings for future use. To store the currently selected
channel’s Fat Channel settings, press the Save button. For complete channel-preset
storage instructions, see Section 5.2.
Tutorials
Technical
Information
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
22
Owner’s Manual
Controls4
Metering4.2
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Metering
Hookup
Overview
4.2
•• The gain reduction for all 16 inputs
•• The output volume of each of the four Aux sends
•• The output volume of Main bus.
Finally, the meters can be used to recall the fader settings for a saved Scene.
4.2.1
StudioLive Metering Controls
The Meters section of the StudioLive is located to the left of the fader bank. Each of
these buttons are toggle switches; you turn them on and off by pressing them. The
meter state can also be changed by pressing another button in the Meter section, or
any Select button on the StudioLive, or a Mix or Mix/Pan button in the Aux section.
Tutorials
Turns PFL Input Metering On and Off.
Technical
Information
Switches the meters to display the pre-dynamics, pre-fader level of the input bus.
Meters are one to one (Meter 1 shows the level of Channel 1, etc.).
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
Input Metering
Button
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
It is important to mention that the meters simply overlay the selected Fat Channel
state. For instance, if you have Channel 8 selected and then press the Input
button in the Meter section, the knobs and buttons in the Fat Channel section
will still be active, and any changes made will be applied, but the changes will
not be displayed in the Meter section. The advantage of this is that you can make
adjustments in the Fat Channel, press a Meter button, and monitor your entire mix,
then press the same button to return to setting up your Fat Channel selection.
Connecting
to a
Computer
•• All 16 inputs, post-gain and pre-dynamics, pre-EQ, and pre-fader
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Controls
The StudioLive offers flexible metering at the touch of a button.
The 12 meters in the Fat Channel section can monitor:
23
PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
4Controls
4.3 Input Channel Strip
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Output Metering
Button
Turns PFL Output Metering On and Off.
Overview
Switches the meters to display the post-dynamics, post-fader level of the Aux and
Main buses. Only the last six meters are used. Meter 7 displays Aux 1 output, Meter 8
displays Aux 2 output, Meter 9/10 displays Aux 3 output, Meter 11/12 displays Aux 4
output, and Meters 13/14 and 15/16 display the left and right side, respectively, of
the Main bus.
Hookup
Gain Reduction
Metering Button
Turns Gain Reduction Metering On and Off.
Displays the gain reduction of the input bus. Meters have a one-to-one relationship
with channels (that is, Meter 1 shows the gain reduction of Channel 1 and so on).
Controls
Fader Locate Button
Turns Fader-Recall Metering On and Off.
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Displays the fader position of the stored Scene. When recalling a fader position,
adjust the fader until only the center LED is visible in its meter. To recall the stored
position of an Aux or Main fader, simply move the fader. The meters will instantly flip
to display the stored position of each of the output faders. The same meters that
display the outputs are used for locate.
Power User Tip: Fader Locate mode can be enabled at any time to recall the
stored fader position. If you’ve made multiple changes after a Scene recall, you can
always recall your stored fader position by simply engaging Fader Locate.
Connecting
to a
Computer
4.3
Input Channel Strip
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
The StudioLive is equipped with all of the standard input controls of an analog mixer.
In addition, the StudioLive provides the added flexibility of routing a playback stream
from your audio-recording software to the mixer via the FireWire bus, just as if it were
an analog input. This lets you incorporate digital audio tracks into the main mix as
well as inserting plug-in effects and software instruments from your audio program.
4.3.1
Input Channel Controls
Trim Control
Adjusts the Input Gain Level
Tutorials
The Trim control adjusts the gain of the channel’s analog input.
It is very important to properly adjust this control in order to minimize noise and avoid overload
distortion. Follow the Quick Start level-setting instructions on page 5 before operating a channel.
Technical
Information
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
24
Input Channel Select
Button
Enables Fat Channel Processing and Routing.
As previously described in Section 4.1.1, the Select button routes its channel
through the Fat Channel, allowing you to add dynamics processing, EQ, and panning
and more.
Input Channel
MultiMode Button
Engages FireWire Return, Solo, and Mute .
Connecting
to a
Computer
This button’s function is determined by the MultiMode Control Switches. Depending
on which mode is engaged, this button will function as the FireWire Return, Solo, or
Mute button for its input channel. For more information on the MultiMode Buttons
and their functions, please refer to Section 4.5.
Overview
The StudioLive is equipped with individual phantom power for every microphone
input. As previously described in Section 4.1.3, the 48V button is accessible via the Fat
Channel when an input channel is selected. It will illuminate when phantom power is
activated. For more information on phantom power and the microphones that
require it, please review Section 8.1.
Hookup
Turns Phantom Power On/Off.
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Controls4
Input Channel Strip 4.3
Controls
Phantom Power
Button
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Owner’s Manual
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Controls the Overall Level of the Channel.
Each input channel features a 60 mm fader for level adjustment. Unity gain (0 dB) is
denoted by a “U.”
The white area above the fader can be used as a scribble strip. Use only
oil pencils; other types of pens or pencils cannot be wiped off.
Technical
Information
Tutorials
To clean the scribble strip, use a lightly damp cloth to remove the writing.
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
Channel Fader
25
PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
4Controls
4.4 Aux Sends
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
4.4
Aux Sends
The StudioLive has four analog aux buses and two internal effects buses. The aux
buses are mono; however, two aux buses can be linked to create a stereo bus.
Section 8.5 discusses how to use these aux buses for monitor and effects mixing.
Overview
4.4.1
Analog Aux Send Controls
Hookup
Aux MultiMode Button Solos and/or Mutes Aux Output.
Controls
This button’s function is determined by the MultiMode Control Switches. Depending
on which mode is engaged, this button will function as the Solo or Mute button for
its input channel. For more information on the MultiMode buttons and their
functions, please refer to Section 4.5
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Please Note: FireWire Returns are only available for the 16 channels of the Input bus.
When FireWire Return Mode is engaged, only the channel multimode buttons will
function.
Aux Output Select
Button
Enables Fat Channel Viewing.
Connecting
to a
Computer
As previously described in section 4.1.1, the Select button routes its aux bus through
the Fat Channel, allowing you to add dynamics processing and EQ.
Aux Output Fader
Controls the Overall Level of the Aux Output.
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Each Aux features a 60 mm fader for level adjustment. Unity gain (0 dB) is denoted by
a “U.”
The white area above the fader can be used as a scribble strip. Use only
oil pencils; other types of pens or pencils cannot be wiped off.
To clean the scribble strip, use a lightly damp cloth to remove the writing.
Tutorials
Technical
Information
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
26
Controls4
Aux Sends 4.4
Enables Fat Channel Viewing.
As described in section 4.1.1, the Select button routes its Effects bus through the Fat
Channel, allowing you to add dynamics processing and EQ.
Main Assign Button
Assigns/Unassigns FX bus to Main Output.
Controls
This button will route its internal effects (EFX) bus to the Main output. It will
illuminate yellow when the bus is patched to the Mains. To mute the effect bus in the
Main output, simply unassign it.
Aux Assign Button
Assigns/Unassigns FX bus to Aux 1-4.
This button will route its internal effects (EFX) bus to all four Aux outputs. It will
illuminate yellow when the bus is patched to the Aux buses. To mute the effect bus in
the Auxes, simply unassign it.
Adjusts the Master Level of the Effects Bus.
Technical
Information
Tutorials
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Connecting
to a
Computer
This knob controls the overall output level of the effects mix return.
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
Output Level Knob
Overview
Internal Effects Send
Select Button
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Internal FX Send Controls
Hookup
4.4.2
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Owner’s Manual
27
PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
4Controls
4.4 Aux Sends
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
4.4.3
Creating Aux and FX Mixes
In addition to setting the dynamics for each channel and bus and
metering each channel and output, the Fat Channel also allows you to
create Aux mixes and quickly view the send level for each channel.
Overview
The Encoder Mode buttons to the left of the Fat Channel are used
for just this purpose. Each one of these buttons allow you to view
and set the send level for each channel to that Aux or FX mix.
Hookup
FXA Encoder
Mode Button
Enables FXA Mixing and Metering in the Fat Channel.
Controls
When this button is enabled, the 12 encoders in the Fat Channel become the FX-send
level controls for each of their respective input channels to FXA. The meters will
display the send level of each of the input channels. The encoders for the stereo
channels set the send level for both the Left and Right input provided that stereo
linking is enabled. See 4.1.4 for details.
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
FXB Encoder
Mode Button
Enables FXB Mixing and Metering in the Fat Channel.
When this button is enabled, the 12 encoders in the Fat Channel become the
effects-send level controls for each of their respective input channels to FXB. The
meters will display the send level of each of the input channels. The encoders for the
stereo channels set the send level for both the Left and Right input provided that
stereo linking is enabled. See 4.1.4 for details.
Connecting
to a
Computer
Aux 1 Encoder
Mode Button
Enables Aux Mixing and Metering in the Fat Channel.
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
When this button is enabled, the 12 encoders in the Fat Channel become the
aux-send level controls for each of their respective input channels to Aux 1. The
meters will display the send level of each of the input channels. The encoders for the
stereo channels set the send level for both the Left and Right input provided that
stereo linking is enabled. See 4.1.4 for details.
Aux 2 Encoder
Mode Button
Enables Aux Mixing or Pan Control (Stereo Send Mode Only) and Metering in the Fat Channel.
Tutorials
When this button is enabled, the 12 encoders in the Fat Channel become the
aux-send level controls for each of their respective input channels to Aux 2. The
meters will display the send level of each of the input channels. The encoders for the
stereo channels set the send level for both the Left and Right input provided that
stereo linking is enabled.
Technical
Information
When Aux 1 and Aux 2 are linked, this button enabled pan control for each
channel in the Aux pair. When this button is enabled, the 12 encoders in the Fat
Channel become the pan controls for each of their respective input channels.
The meters will display the pan setting of each of the input channels. Use Aux
1 Encoder mode to set the send level of each channel to the Aux pair.
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
For more information of stereo linking, please review Section 4.1.4.
28
When this button is enabled, the 12 encoders in the Fat Channel become the
Aux-send level controls for each of their respective input channels to Aux 3. The
meters will display the send level of each of the input channels. The encoders for the
stereo channels set the send level for both the Left and Right input provided that
stereo linking is enabled. See 4.1.4 for details.
Enables Aux Mixing or Pan Control (Stereo Send Mode Only) and Metering in the Fat Channel.
When this button is enabled, the 12 encoders in the Fat Channel become the
Aux-send level controls for each of their respective input channels to Aux 4. The
meters will display the send level of each of the input channels. The encoders for the
stereo channels set the send level for both the Left and Right input provided that
stereo linking is enabled.
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
When Aux 3 and Aux 4 are linked, this button enabled pan control for each
channel in the Aux pair. When this button is enabled, the 12 encoders in the Fat
Channel become the pan controls for each of their respective input channels.
The meters will display the pan setting of each of the input channels. Use Aux
3 Encoder mode to set the send level of each channel to the Aux pair.
Technical
Information
Tutorials
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Connecting
to a
Computer
For more information of stereo linking, please review Section 4.1.4.
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
Aux 4 Encoder
Mode Button
Overview
Enables Aux Mixing and Metering in the Fat Channel.
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Controls4
Aux Sends 4.3
Hookup
Aux 3 Encoder
Mode Button
Controls
Owner’s Manual
29
PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
4Controls
4.5Multimodes
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
4.5
MultiModes
Each channel and Aux on the StudioLive 16.0.2 features a MultiMode
button. These buttons allow you to solo or mute a channel or Aux as
well as engage the channel FireWire returns from the same button!
Overview
The function of these buttons is determined by the control buttons
directly to the left of the row of the MultiMode buttons.
Hookup
4.5.1
MultiMode Controls and the Buttons that Love Them
FireWire Return
Mode Switch
Turns FireWire Playback Streaming On/Off.
Controls
When FireWire Return Mode is engaged, the MultiMode buttons on each channel
function as the FireWire Input buttons for each channel. When a MultiMode button is
engaged while in this mode, it routes a playback stream from your audio software to
the StudioLive’s channel inputs, where it is routed and processed the same way as
analog input signals. For example, if you want a particular recorded track to play back
on mixer channel 3, simply route that track in your audio software to StudioLive
Output 3. This button can also be used to insert a plug-in effect into the mix. For
more information on this feature, please review Section 6.4.2.
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
While in FireWire Return mode, each MultiMode button that is enabled will
illuminate orange to alert you that the FireWire return is engaged for that channel.
Connecting
to a
Computer
POWER USER TIP: When a FireWire return is engaged, the analog input is bypassed to
the mix bus. Because of this, do not engage a FireWire return when your StudioLive is not
connected and synced to a computer, as it will mute the analog input globally.
Solo Mode Switch
Turns Soloing On and Off.
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
When Solo Mode is engaged, the MultiMode buttons on each channel function as
the Solo buttons for each channel and Aux. When a MultiMode button is engaged
while in this mode, it will solo its channel to the main outputs or to the monitor
outputs, depending on whether PFL, AFL, or SIP is selected in the Solo bus section.
Please review Section 8.8 for details.
While in Solo Mode, each MultiMode button that is enabled will
illuminate yellow to alert you that the channel is soloed.
Tutorials
When a channel or bus is soloed, it will automatically be
selected, and its Select button will illuminate.
Technical
Information
POWER USER TIP: When Solo In Place is engaged, Solo mode will display both the solos and
subsequent mutes across the MultiMode buttons; that is, if you solo Channel 1 while in Solo
In Place, Channel 1’s MultiMode button will illuminate yellow; all other MultiMode buttons
will illuminate red. However, any MultiMode button you engage will solo that channel.
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
30
Owner’s Manual
Controls4
Main Output Bus 4.6
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Turns Mutes On and Off.
Overview
When Mute mode is engaged, the MultiMode buttons on each channel function as
the Mute buttons for each channel and Aux. When a MultiMode button is engaged
while in this mode, it will mute its channel to the Main and Aux outputs.
While in Solo mode, each MultiMode button that is enabled will
illuminate red to alert you that the channel is muted.
Main Select Button
Hookup
Main Output Bus
Enables Fat Channel Viewing.
Controls the Level of the Main Output.
The fader controls the overall level of the main stereo output.
The white area above the fader can be used as a scribble strip. Use only
oil pencils. Other types of pens or pencils cannot be wiped off.
Technical
Information
Tutorials
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
To clean the scribble strip, use a lightly damp cloth to remove the writing. Spit works
pretty well, too.
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
Main Fader
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
As previously described in Section 4.1.1, the Select button routes its channel through
the Fat Channel, enabling you to add dynamics processing, EQ, panning, etc.
Controls
4.6
Connecting
to a
Computer
Mute Button
31
PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
4Controls
4.7 Master Section
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
4.7
Master Section
The Master section of the StudioLive controls the
monitoring, Talkback output, and Solo bus.
Overview
Hookup
Controls
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
4.7.1
Talkback System
Connecting
to a
Computer
The StudioLive features a Talkback microphone input on the back panel. This can be
routed to the Aux outputs and to the Mains. It is important to note that the Aux
outputs are grouped in this section. For example, if you are using Aux 3 as the
monitor mix to the bass player’s floor wedge and Aux 4 as the mix to the keyboard
player’s in-ear monitors, the talkback signal will be sent to both monitors—so don’t
say anything you wouldn’t want both to hear!
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Power User Tip: The Talkback mic preamp is a high-quality XMAX preamp, the same model that the
channel inputs have. If your musicians are using in-ear monitoring on stage, they can feel isolated
from the audience and require an ambience microphone. You can use the Talkback input for just this
purpose without using up a channel.
Talkback Mic Level
Controls the Overall Level of the Talkback Mic.
Tutorials
This knob controls the overall volume of the Talkback mic input. The trim for the
Talkback mic is located on the back panel next to the input. See Section 3.1 for
details.
Technical
Information
Please Note: The Talkback mic preamp does not pass through the analog to digital
converters. Because of this, while the Talkback function buttons (assign to Aux 1-2, assign
to Aux 3-4, and Talk) are recalled with a scene, the Talkback level is not recallable.
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
32
Controls4
Master Section 4.7
Assigns the Talkback Mic to the Aux and/or Main Outs.
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Output Select Buttons
Hookup
Talkback Buttons
Overview
These buttons assign the talkback mic to a specified output. These buttons are
toggled on/off and will illuminate indicating that the Talkback output is active. The
talkback mic can be assigned to every output at the same time.
Turns the Talkback Mic On and Off.
4.7.2
Controls
This latching button turns the talkback mic on and off. It will illuminate to indicate
that the talkback mic is active.
Solo Bus
Adjusts the Overall Volume of the Solo Bus.
.
PFL Toggle Button
Enables PFL Solo Mode.
The PFL button engages Pre-Fader Listening in the Solo bus. Pressing Solo on any
channel or bus routes that channel to the Solo bus and has no effect on the main or
aux mixes. The Aux bus soloing is always PFL, regardless of whether this mode
is engaged.
33
Technical
Information
Tutorials
This knob adjusts the overall level for the Solo bus.
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
Solo Bus Volume
Control
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Connecting
to a
Computer
The StudioLive features a Solo bus for flexible monitoring. In this way, you can
fine-tune a vocal compressor in your control-room monitors or headphones while
the rest of the band is warming up or audition an aux mix for more accurate
adjustments. For more information on using the Solo bus, please review Section 8.8.
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Owner’s Manual
PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
4Controls
4.7 Master Section
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
AFL Toggle Button
Enables AFL Solo Mode.
Overview
The AFL button engages After-Fader Listening in the Solo bus. Pressing Solo on any
channel or bus routes that channel to the Solo bus and has no effect on the main or
aux mixes. The AFL is not available on the Aux buses.
SIP (Stereo In Place)
On/Off Button
Enables Solo In Place Mode.
Hookup
SIP (Solo In Place), or “destructive soloing,” mutes every unsoloed channel on the
StudioLive. The muted channels will be muted in the Main outputs. Note that while
you can manually unmute a channel, this mode should be used with extreme
caution during a live performance. Only the input channels can be placed into
destructive soloing. The Aux buses are omitted from SIP mode.
Controls
To enable SIP, press and hold the button until it illuminates red. This ensures
that you cannot enter into destructive Solo mode by accident.
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
When SIP is engaged, channel mutes will only apply to the Main bus.
SIP does not mute input channels in Aux Send mixes.
4.7.3
Monitor Bus
Connecting
to a
Computer
The StudioLive features a headphone output and control-room outputs, giving you
the ability to monitor multiple sources on the StudioLive. The Monitor bus on the
StudioLive allows you to monitor the main outputs, Solo bus, and the main FireWire
return from your computer. Because the Monitor bus is a summing amp, you can
even monitor the World Series on your headphones while running sound at a show.
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Tutorials
Headphone Output
Level Control
Adjusts the Overall Level of the Headphone Output.
Technical
Information
This knob adjusts the overall level for the headphone output.
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
34
Owner’s Manual
Monitor Output
Level Control
Controls4
Master Section 4.7
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Adjusts the Overall Level of the Monitor Output.
Assigns FireWire Returns 1 and 2 to the Monitor Bus.
The FireWire Monitor button patches FireWire returns 1 and 2 to the monitor bus. The
level for this input is controlled by the level set from the computer application (such
as Studio One Artist) that is playing the audio.
The Solo Bus Monitor button patches any soloed channel or Aux send to the Monitor
bus. This can be useful in any number of ways. For example:
•• Auditioning an Aux-send monitor mix
•• Dialing in the dynamics processing and EQ on a subgroup
•• Creating a better blend for instrumental sections (horns, strings, etc.)
Assigns the Main Mix to the Monitor Bus.
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
The Main Mix Monitor button routes the same signal that is being sent from the main
outputs to the Monitor bus. This signal is always pre-fader.
Technical
Information
Tutorials
Power User Tip: By summing the Main mix and the Solo bus, you can raise the volume of the
channel you’re tweaking without affecting the mix the audience is hearing. To do this, enable
both the Main mix and the Solo bus in your monitors. Solo the channels you need to work
on and raise the Solo Output level so that the channels are louder than the Main mix.
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
Main Mix
Monitor Button
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Assigns the Solo Bus to the Monitor Outputs.
Connecting
to a
Computer
Solo Bus
Monitor Button
Controls
FireWire Monitor Button
Hookup
Overview
This knob adjusts the overall level of the control-room monitor outputs.
35
4Controls
4.8 Digital Effects | Master Control
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
4.8
PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
Digital Effects | Master Control
Overview
From the Digital Effects | Master Control section, you can select and change the
parameters of the two internal effects processors, and you can store and recall every
setting on your StudioLive. (See Section 5, “Scenes, Presets, and System Menu.”)
Because almost all of the StudioLive’s features are controlled from the mixing
surface (rather than using menus and submenus), you will mainly use this section
to adjust the internal effects processors and to save and recall presets and Scenes.
Hookup
Controls
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Connecting
to a
Computer
4.8.1
The Digital FX (Effects) Menu
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
The StudioLive features two internal effects processors. Each processor can access the
StudioLive’s selection of high-quality reverbs and delays. As described in Section 8.4,
each of these effects can be routed to any of the subgroups, the Aux bus, or the main
outputs. To access the effects library and make adjustments to effect parameters,
press the FX button in the Master Control section.
Tutorials
The first page of the FX menu is the QuickView screen.
It displays both of the effects assigned to the internal
effects buses, the main parameter for each, and to
which Aux buses the effect is being routed. Effect A is
assigned to EFX A bus, and Effect B is assigned to EFX
B bus. Use the Next and Prev buttons to navigate
through the screen. To change a parameter, use the
Value encoder directly beneath the LCD screen.
The color will invert for each parameter
when it is selected for modification.
Technical
Information
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
The Next button will scroll through this screen in the following order: FX A library
selection, FX A main parameter, FX B library selection, FX B main parameter. When
choosing your effects preset, use the Value encoder to scroll through the library.
When you have arrived at your selection, press the Recall button to load it.
36
Time is the delay time, discussed in Section 8.6.2, which is the time
between the source sound and the echo. This can be adjusted
manually with the Value encoder, or you can use the Tap button to
enter a delay time in tempo with the music being played.
Time X is the value of the beat you are using as a reference for the tempo. The basic
unit of measure is a quarter note, so for example, if the beats you are tapping
represent quarter notes in the music, you would set Time X to 1.00. If they are eighth
notes, you would set Time X to 0.50; half notes would be 2.00, and so on. In this way,
you can precisely synchronize or syncopate the delay echoes to the music in real
time. You do not have to select the Time parameter in order to use the Tap button.
However, you have to be on the Extended Parameters (page 2 for FX A and page 3 for
FX B), or you must select the Time parameter for the desired effect on the first screen
of the FX menu. The Tap button does not function when any other page is active.
Turn the Value Encoder clockwise or counterclockwise to change the letter. The StudioLive allows
you to customize the name with uppercase and
lowercase letters and a selection of numerals and
punctuation marks. Press the Tap button to quickly
insert a space.
Once you are satisfied with your changes, press the Store button, which will
illuminate while the effects preset is written to the StudioLive’s internal memory.
Once the preset is saved, the Store button will return to its unlit status.
Tutorials
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Pages 4 and 5 allow you to store your changes for FX A and FX B, respectively,
to the same location or to a new location and to customize the name of
your creation. You can jump to these pages by simply pressing the Store
button while FXA or FXB is selected in the FX Menu. Use the Value Encoder
to change the library location to which you will store your new effects
preset unless you wish to overwrite the currently selected preset location.
Press the Next button to navigate to the first letter of the preset name.
Connecting
to a
Computer
When you choose a delay algorithm, you will notice
two parameters: Time (ms) and Time X.
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Controls
Hookup
For example, if you would like to change the effect
from a Large Hall reverb to a Room Ambiance
reverb, press the Recall button to load the
effect, and then change the various parameters
to taste. Press the Page Up button again to
move to the full parameter view of FX B.
Overview
Press the Page Down button to move to the next page
of the FX menu. Pages 2 and 3 of the FX menu display
the rest of the parameters for FX A and FX B,
respectively. These parameters will change depending
on what type of effect you have chosen. Again, use
the Next and Prev buttons to navigate through the
screen and use the Value encoder to change the
selected parameter.
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Controls4
Digital Effects | Master Control 4.8
Technical
Information
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
Owner’s Manual
37
PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
4Controls
4.8 Digital Effects | Master Control
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
4.8.2
Digital Effects Library
Overview
Your StudioLive contains a library of 50 custom reverb and delay
presets designed by PreSonus. In addition to these presets, there
are 50 free locations for you to build your own custom effects library
The factory presets can be altered, renamed, and overwritten.
Hookup
Controls
Connecting
to a
Computer
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
No
TYPE
NAME
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
AMBIENCE
Natural
Lively
Closet
Studio A
Studio B
Bedroom
Kitchen
Tile Floors
Tile Bathroom
Concrete Floors
Radio Booth
Small Club
Big Club
Brick House
Linoleum Room
Tile Room
Log Cabin
Wood Floors
Brick Club
High Ceilings
GateVerb Short
GateVerb Med
GateVerb Long
GateVerb Extreme
SMALL ROOM
BRIGHT ROOM
SMALL HALL
BRIGHT HALL
WARM HALL
GATED HALL
F25
F26
F27
F28
F29
F30
F31
F32
F33
F34
F35
F36
F37
F38
F39
F40
F41
F42
F43
F44
F45
F46
F47
F48
F49
F50
F5199
Tutorials
Technical
Information
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
38
TYPE
NAME
LARGE HALL
Church
Cathedral
Gymnasium
Arena
PlateVerb Shimmer
PlateVerb Thick
PlateVerb Drums
PlateVerb Vox
M: Short Tail
M: Short Slap
M: Long Slap
M: Triplet
M: Triplet
Analog Slap
Analog Trip
Analog 8th
Slap Quick
Long Slap
Spacey
Long Tail
ST: Triplet
Ping-pong Slap
Ping-pong Delay
Ping-pong Spacey
Ping-pong Trip
Ping-Pong Purple Rain
PLATE
MONO DELAY
FILTER DELAY
STEREO DELAY
PING-PONG DELAY
USER-CREATED
PRESETS
Owner’s Manual
Scenes, Presets, System Menu, and MIDI Control
5
Creating and Recalling a Scene 5.1
The StudioLive allows you to customize the name with uppercase and
lowercase letters and a selection of numerals and punctuation marks.
Press the Tap button to quickly insert a space. Continue this process until you are
satisfied with your changes, then press the Store button. It will illuminate while the
scene is being written to the StudioLive’s internal memory. Once the Scene is saved,
the Store button will return to its unlit status.
Hookup
Controls
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Technical
Information
Tutorials
Located at position S1 is a Scene named Zero Out (Board Reset). This Scene
Connecting
to a
Computer
To save a Scene, press the Scene button and page
down to the second screen or press the Store button
to launch the Scene Store menu. The memory
locations will be selected. Use the Value Encoder to
scroll to a free location in the Scene library. Now name
your Scene: Press the Next button to navigate to the
first letter of the preset name and turn the Value
Encoder clockwise or counter-clockwise to change
the letter.
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
The StudioLive allows you to create and store a library
of Scenes. A Scene is like a snapshot of your mix. It
stores each Fat Channel parameter for every input and
bus, as well as each fader’s position, the aux and
effects mixes, channel mutes and solos, and the input
selection (analog input or FireWire playback stream).
Creating a Scene requires simply dialing in a mix that
you would like to use at a later date and saving it. This
has obvious benefits for both studio and live sound.
For example, in the studio, saving and recalling a
Scene allows you to move to another song or project
and come back to the current mix later. For live shows
with multiple bands, you can set up custom mixes for
each band at sound check and recall the mix when
that band goes onstage or save custom mixes for each
venue that a band plays repeatedly.
Overview
Creating and Recalling a Scene
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
5.1
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
5.0 Scenes, Presets, the System Menu, and MIDI Control
39
5
5.1
PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
Scenes, Presets, System Menu, and MIDI Control
Creating and Recalling a Scene
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
cannot be overwritten and returns your StudioLive to its default factory
setting. All you have to do is lower the faders and return all trim knobs and
output volume knobs (Solo bus, FXA and FXB output, Phones, and Monitor)
to their lowest position. Your StudioLive will be zeroed out as follows:
Overview
SETTINGS
INPUTS AND BUSES
INPUT CHANNELS
ASSIGN
PAN
SOLO
MUTE
MAINS
C
OFF
OFF
OFF
Hookup
AUXES 1-4
N/A
C
FX A / FX B
MAINS
C
TALKBACK
NULL
MAIN BUS
OFF
LINK
SENDS
CH1
SELECT
OFF
NULL
NULL
OFF
MODE
PRE 1
NULL
NULL
POST / F1
NULL
C
NULL
SOLO BUS
AFL
MONITOR BUS
MAIN
TAPE IN
NULL
NULL
Controls
METER MODE
NULL
NULL
MASTER CONTROL
FX
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
The Fat Channel will be restored to the same setting for every input and
output on your StudioLive. Each of the dynamics processors and the three
bands of the EQ will be turned off. Their parameters will be set as follows:
FAT CHANNEL PARAMETERS
HIPASS
75 Hz
NOISE GATE
THR
N/A
LIMITER
OFF
COMPRESSOR
THR
0 dB
EQ
P/S
LOW
peak
L.MID
n/a
HIGH
peak
RAT
2:1
H/L
n/a
low
n/a
RESP
MED
FREQ
130 Hz
96 Hz
5 kHz
GAIN
0 dB
GAIN
0 dB
0 dB
0 dB
Connecting
to a
Computer
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
POWER USER TIP: Before beginning any new mixing situation, it is always recommended
to recall the Zero Out (Board Reset) Scene. This is the easiest way to ensure that there are
no lingering parameter settings that could cause you some trouble in your new mix.
To recall a Scene, press the Scene button and use the
Value encoder to scroll through the Scene library.
When you have found the Scene you wish to recall,
press the Recall button. By default, the StudioLive will
recall all stored parameters (Fat Channel settings,
channel muting and soloing, Aux mixes, and internal
effects parameters) except fader, knob, and graphic
EQ positions.
Tutorials
Technical
Information
If you do not wish to recall a certain set of parameters,
simply set its Recalling group to “No” by using
the Next and Prev buttons to navigate through
the screen. When the Recalling group that you
wish to disable is selected, turn the Value Encoder
counter-clockwise to move it to the No (off )
position. Once you have disabled the parameters
you do not wish to recall, press the Recall button.
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
40
Scenes, Presets, System Menu, and MIDI Control
5
Creating and Recalling a Scene 5.1
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
The StudioLive’s recallable parameters are grouped as follows:
•• Mute: All channel and bus mutes (Channels 1-15/16, Aux 1-4)
•• FX: All parameters for the internal effects assigned to FXA and FXB
Overview
•• Assigns: All output and bus routing (Stereo Linking, FireWire returns to
inputs, Solo and Monitor bus assignments, FXA and FXB assignments,
and Master Control (Monitor and Solo Bus) assignments)
Hookup
•• E Q and Dyn: Fat Channel panning, phase, dynamics processing
(Noise Gate, Compressor, EQ, and Limiter), and High-Pass
Filter parameters for every channel and bus
•• Aux Mix: All aux mixes (analog Aux Mixes 1-4, FXA and FXB, FXA/B
to Mains, FXA/B to Aux 1-4, and Pre1/Pre2 positions)
Controls
•• Faders: All fader positions
•• Pots: All digital knob positions (FXA and FXB Levels, Solo
Bus Output, Phones, and Monitor knobs)
•• GEQ: Graphic EQ settings
Connecting
to a
Computer
If you enable fader positions as a part of a Scene recall, when you press the Recall
button, the StudioLive will automatically put the meters in Fader Locate mode. The
Fader Locate button will illuminate, and the meter section of the Fat Channel will
display the recalled fader position. To recall the stored position, move the faders up
or down until only the center LED is illuminated in each meter. To recall the Aux and
Main bus faders, simply move one of them. The Fat Channel meters will display the
recalled positions using the same meters on which each output is monitored.
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
As long as you remain in Fader Locate mode, the faders on your StudioLive will
not be active. The level of the audio passing through them will be set according
to the stored fader position, not the current location of the physical fader.
Once you have recalled each of the faders to their Scene location, press the
Locate button again. This will take you out of Fader Locate mode and reactivate
your faders so that they control the level of their channels and buses.
Tutorials
If you enable knob positions as a part of your Scene recall, all of the digital
knobs (FXA and FXB levels, Solo-bus output, Phones, and Monitor) will remain
at their stored position until they are moved manually. Once a knob is turned,
its value will jump to the value of its current physical position. Therefore, if
you intend to save a Scene and recall it later with knob-position recalling
enabled, it is highly recommended that you use the recall sheet provided
in the back of this manual to note the stored position of these controls.
Technical
Information
It is important to note that the recalling groups have no effect on what
parameters are stored with a Scene. All storable parameters are saved
with a Scene regardless of what recalling groups are enabled.
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
Owner’s Manual
41
5
5.2
Scenes, Presets, System Menu, and MIDI Control
Saving and Loading Channel Presets
PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
A Quick Note About the AutoStore Feature
Overview
It is not necessary to create a Scene in order to preserve the StudioLive’s settings
when you power it down. Periodically, you will notice the Store button flash
once, indicating that the current settings on your StudioLive have been saved
to internal memory. The StudioLive will take a snapshot of the current position
of every parameter on the mixer whenever no changes have been made for ten
seconds. If you wish to ensure that your StudioLive will hold its current settings
before you power down, simply wait for a few seconds until the Store button
flashes. This is your indication that it is now safe to turn off your StudioLive. The
next time you turn it on, all of your settings will be recalled automatically.
Hookup
Please note: If you make changes to a stored Scene, AutoStore will not save these changes
as a permanent part of the Scene. Any changes made to a Scene in the StudioLive’s library
must be saved using the Scene menu, as described in the first part of this section.
Controls
5.2
Saving and Loading Channel Presets
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
The StudioLive comes with a suite of channel-strip presets created
by professional users of PreSonus products. These presets provide
a great jumping-off point to create a mix quickly and easily. The
StudioLive also allows you to create your own library of presets.
To load a preset to any channel on the StudioLive, first press the Select button for the
desired channel. From the Fat Channel, press the Load button. You will notice that
LCD now displays the Channel Preset Load menu.
Connecting
to a
Computer
The Channel Preset Load menu always displays the
selected channel onto which the preset will be
loaded. Use the Value encoder to locate the preset
you would like to use. Once you have made your
selection, press the Recall button. If at any time you
would like to cancel this operation, simply press the
Load button again.
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Power User Tip: Load will stay active until you press the button again to disable
it, even if you select another channel. Because of this, you can quickly add a preset
to every channel and give yourself a jumping off point to dial in your mix.
If you have created a channel-strip setting in the Fat Channel that you would like to
save to the Channel Preset library, press the Fat Channel’s Save button. You will notice
that the LCD will display the Channel Preset Save menu.
Tutorials
To begin, use the Value encoder to scroll to an empty
position in the Channel Preset library. Press the Next
button to navigate to the category location. Create the
category in which your preset would fit (DRM, VOX,
GTR, etc.). Press the Next button again to navigate to
the first letter of the preset name.
Technical
Information
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
Turn the Value Encoder clockwise or counter-clockwise to change the letter.
The StudioLive allows you to customize the name with uppercase and
lowercase letters, as well as a selection of numerals and punctuation marks.
You can insert a space by simply pressing the Tap button. Once you are
satisfied with your changes, press the Store button. It will illuminate while the
Channel preset is being written to the StudioLive’s internal memory. Once
the Channel preset is saved, the Store button will return to its unlit state.
42
Owner’s Manual
Scenes, Presets, System Menu, and MIDI Control
5
Saving and Loading Channel Presets 5.2
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Channel Presets Library
Controls
Hookup
EMPTY LOCATION
EMPTY LOCATION
EMPTY LOCATION
EMPTY LOCATION
EMPTY LOCATION
EMPTY LOCATION
EMPTY LOCATION
EMPTY LOCATION
EMPTY LOCATION
EMPTY LOCATION
EMPTY LOCATION
EMPTY LOCATION
EMPTY LOCATION
EMPTY LOCATION
EMPTY LOCATION
EMPTY LOCATION
EMPTY LOCATION
EMPTY LOCATION
EMPTY LOCATION
EMPTY LOCATION
EMPTY LOCATION
EMPTY LOCATION
EMPTY LOCATION
EMPTY LOCATION
EMPTY LOCATION
EMPTY LOCATION
EMPTY LOCATION
EMPTY LOCATION
EMPTY LOCATION
EMPTY LOCATION
EMPTY LOCATION
EMPTY LOCATION
EMPTY LOCATION
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
Connecting
to a
Computer
KEY: Vibes
HRN: Trumpet
HRN: Trombone
HRN: Sax
HRN: Sax Solo
PRC: Congas
PRC: Bongos
PRC: Cowbell
PRC: Tambourine
VOX: Male 1
VOX: Male 2
VOX: Male 3
VOX: Female 1
VOX: Female 2
VOX: Female 3
VOX: Speech 1
VOX: Speech 2
EMPTY LOCATION
EMPTY LOCATION
EMPTY LOCATION
EMPTY LOCATION
EMPTY LOCATION
EMPTY LOCATION
EMPTY LOCATION
EMPTY LOCATION
EMPTY LOCATION
EMPTY LOCATION
EMPTY LOCATION
EMPTY LOCATION
EMPTY LOCATION
EMPTY LOCATION
EMPTY LOCATION
EMPTY LOCATION
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
Tutorials
DRM: Kick 1
DRM: Kick 2
DRM: Kick Funk 1
DRM: Kick Funk 2
DRM: Kick Hip-Hop
DRM: Kick Jazz
DRM: Snare 1
DRM: Fat Snare
DRM: Snare Crackalak
DRM: Snare Snappy
DRM: Toms Mid
DRM: Toms Low
DRM: Toms High
DRM: Overhead Rock
DRM: Overhead Jazz
DRM: High Hat
BAS: Electric 1
BAS: Electric 2
BAS: Slap
BAS: Upright
GTR: Rock 1
GTR: Rock 2
GTR: Funk
GTR: Metal
GTR: Jazz
GTR: Acoustic
GTR: Acoustic Strumming
GTR: Acoustic Fingerstyle
KEY: Piano Bright
KEY: Piano Warm
KEY: Piano Jazz
KEY: Piano Electric
KEY: Piano Electric 2
Technical
Information
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Overview
Your StudioLive comes with 50 Fat Channel presets custom designed by
professional PreSonus users. These presets can be altered, renamed, and
overwritten; however, there are 49 additional empty storage locations
where you can build your custom library of channel-strip settings.
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
5.2.1
43
5
5.3
Scenes, Presets, System Menu, and MIDI Control
Graphic Equalizer
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
5.3
PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
Graphic Equalizer
The StudioLive 16.0.2 features a 31-band, 1/3-octave graphic
EQ that can be inserted on the Main output bus.
Overview
If this were a analog graphic equalizer, it would look like this:
EQ-O-Matic
Hookup
Controls
The StudioLive graphic EQ features an innovative design that sets it apart
from traditional graphic EQs. Traditionally, a 31-band graphic EQ uses 31
second-order shelving filters with fixed frequencies in order to simulate
a curve that you set with the 31 front-panel sliders. A well-designed
graphic EQ creates an output frequency responses that corresponds as
closely as possible to the curve displayed graphically by the sliders.
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
In an analog EQ, this is achieved by carefully choosing the bandwidth of the filter
and deciding how, or whether, it varies with the gain and how the filters are summed
or cascaded. In general, narrower bandwidth signifies a higher-quality EQ. But
in traditional graphic EQ designs, the center frequency of each band is fixed.
Connecting
to a
Computer
PreSonus took a different approach with the StudioLive. The StudioLive graphic
EQ is a pool of shelving filters from which coefficients like cutoff frequency,
bandwidth, and gain are extracted through a process of curve-fitting. The curve
entered by the user is first oversampled. The system then works with an internal
curve made up of 128 bands to find coefficients for the first shelving filter
that, when subtracted from the user’s curve, will produce the flattest possible
response: 0 dB. The resulting response is then used to find coefficients for the
second shelving filter through the same optimization process. Coefficients
for all available shelving filters are found through a recursive process.
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Tutorials
Unlike conventional designs, the frequency and bandwidth of the “bands”
depends on the curve entered by the user. This allows for much tighter matching
of that curve. Because of this innovative design, the accuracy of the StudioLive
EQ might feel “wrong” at first. The curve-fitting process is capable of very steep
transitions, and unlike conventional analog graphic EQs, what you see is what
you get. With a carefully drawn, smooth curve the StudioLive EQ will have almost
no frequency ripple. The StudioLive EQ is also capable of very sharp notches.
To widen a notch or a bump on a particular band, just bring the adjacent
bands closer to that band‘s gain, and the bandwidth will change accordingly.
Making drastic adjustments too quickly may create an audio artifact as the
new curve is redrawn and crosses over an audio peak. If you are hearing audio
artifacts while setting up the graphic EQ, try creating a smoother curve.
Technical
Information
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
To turn on and make changes to the graphic EQ, press the GEQ Encoder Mode
button. The GEQ menu will open in the LCD. When the GEQ page is active, the meters
and encoders of the Fat Channel become the controls for the graphic EQ.
As you touch a knob, you will notice that its band number, frequency, and gain
are displayed in the GEQ menu. The 31 bands range from 20 Hz to 20 kHz. The
44
Overview
frequency for each band is fixed. When the GEQ is first launched, bands 11-22 are
controlled by encoders 1-15/16, respectively. When Band 10 is selected in the Show
Band field in the GEQ menu, the meters will flip, and encoders 1-15/16 will control
Bands 1-12, respectively. When Band 23 is selected in the Show Band field in the
GEQ menu, the meters will also flip, and encoders 1-15/16 will control bands 23-31.
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Scenes, Presets, System Menu, and MIDI Control
5
Graphic Equalizer 5.3
POWER USER TIP: Select the Show Band field in the GEQ menu, and use the Value knob to
scroll through all the bands on the graphic EQ to get a quick overview of the entire curve.
Like all other parameters on your StudioLive, your
graphic EQ settings can be stored and recalled. If you
have created a GEQ setting that you would like to save
to the GEQ Preset library, press the Save button in the
Fat Channel while the GEQ is active. You will notice
that the LCD will display the GEQ Save menu.
Connecting
to a
Computer
To begin, use the Value encoder to scroll to an empty position in the GEQ
Preset library. Press the Next button again to navigate to the first letter of the
preset name. Turn the Value Encoder clockwise or counter-clockwise to change
the letter. The StudioLive allows you to customize the name with uppercase
and lowercase letters, as well as a selection of numerals and punctuation
marks. You can insert a space by simply pressing the Tap button. Once you
are satisfied with your changes, press the Store button. It will illuminate while
the GEQ preset is being written to the StudioLive’s internal memory. Once
the GEQ preset is saved, the Store button will return to its unlit state.
Controls
Hookup
You will notice that all meters have one LED illuminated to display the current
gain position for each band, and the meter for the selected band in the Show
Band field is inverted so that all LEDs are illuminated except for the LED that
displays the current gain position for that band. The band does not have to
be selected in the Show Band field for its encoder to be active. All encoders
are active, so you can make changes to 12 of the 31 bands at one time.
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
To load a preset to any channel on the StudioLive, first
navigate to the GEQ page in the System Menu. From
the Fat Channel, press the Load button. Notice that
LCD now displays the GEQ Load menu. Use the Value
encoder to locate the preset you would like to use.
Tutorials
Once you have made your selection, press the Recall button. If at any time you
would like to cancel this operation, simply press the Load button again.
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Owner’s Manual
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
Technical
Information
To exit the GEQ, press any of the other Encoder Mode or Master
Control buttons. Each Master Control button will open its respective
menu, each Encode Mode button will launch the FX menu.
45
5
5.4
PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
Scenes, Presets, System Menu, and MIDI Control
System Menu
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
5.4
System Menu
Overview
In most digital-console manuals, the phrase “System
menu” inspires a sense of dread. However, with the
StudioLive, you have nothing to fear. The System menu
on the StudioLive serves just a few simple functions,
most of which have very little to do with mixing a show.
Hookup
Controls
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
LCD Contrast and LCD Backlight.
Press the System button to access the System
menu. The first page allows you to adjust the LCD
Contrast and LCD Backlight for optimal viewing
in your working environment. These settings
are retained when the unit is powered down.
Aux Pre Position.
Connecting
to a
Computer
Press the Page Down button to access the Aux Pre
Position page. By default, all four Aux buses are set to
Pre 1. This places the send of all 16 channels to each
Aux bus before the fader, limiter, EQ, and compressor
and after the phase-reverse switch, high-pass filter,
and noise gate. The 2 internal effects buses are set
to Post, which sends each of the 16 channels after
all Fat Channel dynamics and EQ and the fader.
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
From this menu, you can choose between three send positions for each Aux mix:
•• P
re 1: Sends each channel to the Aux bus after the
Phase Reverse, High Pass filter, and Gate.
•• Pre 2: Sends each channel to the aux bus after all Fat Channel parameters (Phase
Reverse, High Pass filter, Gate, Compressor, EQ, and Limiter) but before the fader.
Tutorials
•• Post: Sends each channel to the Aux bus after all Fat Channel parameters (PhaseReverse, High Pass filter, Gate, Compressor, EQ, & Limiter), and after the fader.
Technical
Information
POWER USER TIP: Use the Pre 2 position for headphone and in-ear mixes to
give your performers a polished “studio” sound. This setting should be avoided
for floor wedges, as compression can cause feedback problems!
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
If you have two Aux buses stereo linked, you only need to set the Pre
position on the Link Master. Remember, the Link Master is the Aux that
was selected when the link was created. To find out which Aux is the
Link Master, simply select either of the Aux buses in the pair. The Link
Master‘s ID will be shown in the Select Channel LED readout.
46
Scenes, Presets, System Menu, and MIDI Control
5
System Menu 5.4
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Sync Information.
Press the Page Down button to access the
Sync Information page. From here, you
can view your FireWire connectivity.
Overview
When the StudioLive is connected and synced
to a computer via FireWire, the Status will read
“Driver On,” and the Sample Rate will read
“FireWire.” (See Section 7.1.1 for more details.)
Controls
Hookup
To ensure the safety of the audio equipment connected to it, the StudioLive will mute
all post-converter outputs for two seconds when the sample rate is changed and
while the mixer is connecting to a computer. The Main, Control Room, and Aux are
muted. While this offers a good measure of protection to your sound system, it could
put the brakes on a live show. Because of this, it very important that the sample rate
be selected and locked in prior to beginning any recording or performance.
MIDI Control Mode
Your StudioLive 16.0.2 can be remotely controlled
by a MIDI footswitch, keyboard controller, or DAW.
Pages 4 and 5 of the System Menu allow you turn
MIDI Control Mode on as well as select on which MIDI
channels your StudioLive will be controlled, as well as
which MIDI Control Change messages will be used.
The next section, Section 5.5, goes through
MIDI Control Mode in greater detail.
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Connecting
to a
Computer
Lockout Mode
Right out of the box, the StudioLive cannot be locked, so don’t worry
about hitting the wrong button. To enable the Lockout feature, you
must first connect and sync your StudioLive to a computer. Please
review Section 7.2.6 for more information on this feature.
Firmware Version
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
Press the Page Down button to view the firmware
version currently loaded on your StudioLive. You
normally will only view this screen when performing
a system update, in order to confirm that the new
firmware was successfully loaded.
Tutorials
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Your StudioLive features a Lockout mode that
allows you to create a password and lock the
controls. This is especially useful in situations
where several people will be running sound but
only one or two are knowledgeable enough to
set up dynamics processing and the like.
Technical
Information
Owner’s Manual
47
5
5.5
Scenes, Presets, System Menu, and MIDI Control
Using MIDI Control Mode to Remote-Control StudioLive
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
5.5
PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
Using MIDI Control Mode to Remote-Control StudioLive
The StudioLive 16.0.2 features a distinctive MIDI Control Mode,
which, once enabled, allows you to remote-control the following
StudioLive parameters from a MIDI device or DAW:
Overview
•• Scene Recall
•• FXA Preset Recall
•• FXB Preset Recall
Hookup
•• FXA Assign to Mains
•• FXB Assign to Mains
•• FXA Output
Controls
•• FXB Output
•• Main Output Level
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
To enable MIDI Control Mode, navigate to Page 4 of the System Menu
and set MIDI Control Mode to “On” by turning the value encoder.
This will enable your StudioLive 16.0.2’s MIDI features so that the
mixer can be controlled by any standard MIDI controller.
Your StudioLive can be controlled with an MIDI controller connected to the
MIDI In jack on the back of your StudioLive or with a MIDI signal transmitted
over FireWire from a computer. In this section, we will discuss using a hardware
MIDI controller to change the controllable parameters on your StudioLive.
Connecting
to a
Computer
Once you have enabled MIDI Control Mode, set the MIDI Source to “MIDI
In” and connect your MIDI controller’s MIDI Out jack to the MIDI In jack
on your StudioLive 16.0.2. For information on using Studio One Artist or
another DAW to control your StudioLive, please review Section 7.5.8.
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
5.5.1
Recalling Scenes and FX Presets Remotely
MIDI stands for “Musical Instrument Digital Interface.” MIDI enables the
exchange of performance information (musical notes, program changes,
synth parameters, and much more) between electronic musical instruments,
effects devices, computers, and more, and it has also been adopted for
a wide range of other applications, both musical and nonmusical.
Tutorials
Before you begin using MIDI Control Mode, there are a few simple
MIDI terms you should understand: MIDI channels, Program
Change messages, and Control Change messages.
Technical
Information
MIDI data is sent and received on 16 channels. This enables you to send
up to 16 discrete messages to your MIDI device at exactly the same
time. Only one MIDI event can be sent at one time on each channel but
multiple messages can be streamed serially (one after the other).
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
Program Change messages are sent to a device to request a “patch”
change on a specified MIDI channel. StudioLive 16.0.2 uses simple
Program Change messages to recall Scenes and FX presets.
48
Once you have assigned different MIDI channels for FXA, FXB, and
Scene Recall, you simply need to send a Program Change message
on one of those channels, using your external MIDI controller.
5.5.2
Using Control Change Messages to Control Volume and FX Assignments
The other type of MIDI message your StudioLive 16.0.2 uses is the Control Change
(CC) message. A MIDI Control Change message can be used for many things,
including Volume, Pan, Sustain On/Off, and Modulation. Your StudioLive uses CC
messages to control Main and FX Output Volume and FX Assign/Unassign to Mains.
Although the MIDI Detailed Specification assigns particular controls to specified CC
message numbers, you can use any CC message number for these parameters.
To begin, navigate to page 5 of the System Menu and use the value encoder to
assign a unique MIDI channel on which to transmit CC messages to your StudioLive.
Use the Next and Prev buttons to navigate to the FXA, FXB, and Main Output Level
fields, and set the Control Change message number you wish to use to control
the output volume for each bus. You can choose any number from 0 to 127.
Next, navigate to the Mute Effects fields and choose a CC message
number to assign/unassign FXA and FXB to the Main bus.
Connecting
to a
Computer
When you are finished, each parameter on this page should have a different
CC message number next to it. With this accomplished, you simply need to
send one of the assigned Control Change messages to your StudioLive on the
designated MIDI channel, using your hardware MIDI controller or DAW.
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
In order to set the correct volume for FXA, FXB, and Main output level, your
Volume Control Change messages must include values from 0 to 127. FXA and
FXB Assign to Mains is a simple toggle message, so it is not value-dependent.
The next two sections cover setup instructions for the most popular
MIDI footswitch pedals available when this manual was written. If you
are not using one of these devices, please consult the documentation
that came with your MIDI controller to learn how to send Control
Change and Program Change messages on a given MIDI channel.
Tutorials
Controlling the StudioLive 16.0.2 with a Behringer FCB1010
This tutorial will show you how to quickly configure your StudioLive 16.0.2 so that
you can control it with a Behringer FCB1010. The setup configuration detailed here
is just an example; you can customize your own setup using these simple steps.
Technical
Information
Each section in this tutorial will focus on a particular setup area. In
order for your FCB1010 to control your StudioLive as described below,
you must complete the steps in each section of the tutorial.
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
5.5.3
Hookup
Overview
To begin, you must first assign unique MIDI channels for FXA, FXB, and Scene Recall.
This will allow you to send a different Program Change message to each of these
three preset libraries, allowing you to navigate through each preset library on its
own. Using the Next and Prev buttons, navigate to each channel field and set a
MIDI channel using the value encoder. You can choose any channel from 1 to 16.
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Scenes, Presets, System Menu, and MIDI Control
5
Using MIDI Control Mode to Remote-Control StudioLive 5.5
Controls
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Owner’s Manual
49
5
5.5
Scenes, Presets, System Menu, and MIDI Control
Using MIDI Control Mode to Remote-Control StudioLive
PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
After completing this tutorial, you will have three new
presets on your Behringer FCB1010 pedal:
Overview
••
Preset 1 recalls Scene 2 on your StudioLive.
••
Preset 3 recalls “F20: High Ceilings” on FXA on your StudioLive.
••
Preset 6 allows you to control the Main bus assignment for FXA
(effectively muting and unmuting the effect in the Mains) from
Pedal 6 on your FCB1010. You also can control the Main output
volume for your StudioLive using Expression Pedal A.
Hookup
Setting Up Your StudioLive to be Controlled with MIDI
Controls
To begin, you must first set up your StudioLive to be remotely controlled by
your footpedal. In this example, we are setting up the StudioLive to receive
Scene changes on MIDI Channel 1, FXA preset changes on MIDI Channel 2,
and FXB preset changes on MIDI Channel 3. In general, you should set up your
StudioLive so that each library (Scene, FXA, FXB) receives Program Change
messages on its own MIDI channel. The danger of having, for example, Scene
recall and FXA preset recall on the same MIDI channel is that when you change
to Scene 3, you will change the FXA preset to F3: Closet at the same time!
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
For our example, we also have the output levels and FXA/FXB Assign to Mains on
their own MIDI channels (Channel 4). For your setup, it is perfectly fine to have
these controls share a MIDI channel with one of the recall groups. As previously
mentioned, these parameters are controlled using Control Change messages,
not Program Change messages, so there is no chance of a conflict—unless
you assign the same CC message to two different StudioLive parameters.
Connecting
to a
Computer
In addition to setting your MIDI Channels and Control Change messages,
you will also need to set MIDI Control Mode to On and make sure the MIDI
Source is set to the StudioLive’s MIDI Input. Section 7.5.8 will show you
how to control your StudioLive via FireWire using Studio One Artist.
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Navigate to Pages 4 and 5 of your StudioLive system menu
and set each page up as shown in these images:
Tutorials
Setting Up Different MIDI Channels on Your FCB1010
Technical
Information
Next, you need to configure the pedals on your FCB 1010 to send information
on different MIDI channels. We will use Pedal 1 exclusively for Scene changes,
Pedals 2 and 3 for FXA recall, and Pedals 4 and 5 for FXB recall. You can customize
your pedal to meet your needs; these instructions merely provide a guideline.
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
50
Scenes, Presets, System Menu, and MIDI Control
5
Using MIDI Control Mode to Remote-Control StudioLive 5.5
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
1. Boot your FCB1010 into Global configuration mode by holding
the Down pedal while powering on the FCB1010.
Overview
2. PreSonus recommends that you do not use Direct Select mode. When your
FCB1010 boots up, you will see that the green LED above Direct Select is
illuminated. Make sure that the red LED on pedal 10 is not illuminated.
3. Press the Up pedal to select MIDI Function.
Hookup
4. Press Pedal 1 so that its red LED is flashing.
5. Press the Up pedal again to select the MIDI channel for Pedal 1.
Controls
6. For our purposes, Scene recall is assigned to MIDI Channel
1. Press Pedal 1 so that the LED readout displays “1.”
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
7. Press the Up pedal twice to confirm the change
and cycle back to MIDI Function.
8. Next, you’ll assign the MIDI channel for FXA Recall.
Press Pedal 2 so that its red LED is flashing.
9. Press the Up pedal again to select the MIDI channel for Pedal 2.
10. This time, you will select MIDI Channel 2. Press Pedal
2 so that the LED readout displays “2.”
Connecting
to a
Computer
11. Press the Up pedal twice to confirm the change
and cycle back to MIDI Function.
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
12. Repeat steps 8-11 for Pedal 3.
13. Repeat steps 8-11 for Pedals 4 and 5, selecting MIDI Channel 3 for each.
14. You’re almost done! Now you need to set the global MIDI
channel on which your FCB1010 will control FXA and FXB
output levels, assign/unassign FX to Mains, and control the Main
output level. Press Pedal 6 so that its red LED is flashing.
Technical
Information
16. In our example, the global MIDI functions are set to MIDI Channel 4. But you
can assign global MIDI functions to the same channel as any of the recall
functions, if you prefer. Press Pedal 4 so that the LED readout displays “4.”
Tutorials
15. Press the Up pedal to select the MIDI channel for Pedal 6.
17. Press the Up pedal twice to confirm the change
and cycle back to MIDI Function
18. Repeat steps 14-17 for Pedals 7-9.
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
Owner’s Manual
19. Press and hold the Down pedal to exit Global Configuration mode.
51
5
5.5
Scenes, Presets, System Menu, and MIDI Control
Using MIDI Control Mode to Remote-Control StudioLive
PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Making Presets on an FCB1010
Overview
In our example, we will create one preset for Scene recall, one for FXA assign/
unassign to Mains, and one for Main volume control. You can also use these
instructions to create presets for the remaining controllable parameters. We
will create a StudioLive bank of presets on Bank 00. If you have presets already
saved to this bank, you can use any of the other nine banks instead.
Scene Recall
Hookup
1. Select Bank 00 by using the Up or Down pedals.
2. Press Pedal 1 to select Preset 1.
Controls
3. Press and hold the Down pedal to enter Preset Configuration
mode. (You’ll see a flashing green LED.)
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
4. Press the Up pedal to confirm.
5. Press Pedal 1 so that the red LED is flashing.
6. Press the Up pedal to make the Program Change assignment.
7. Select Scene 02 using Pedal 2 or Expression Pedal A.
8. Press the Up pedal to confirm.
Connecting
to a
Computer
9. Press and hold the Down pedal to exit.
FXA Preset Recall
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
1. To set up pedal control of FXA preset changes, press Pedal 3 so that Preset
3 is selected on your FCB1010. Make sure that Bank 00 is still selected.
2. Repeat Scene Recall steps 3-9, using Expression Pedal A to select FX preset 20.
FXA Assign/Unassign to Main Bus and Main Output Level Control
Tutorials
Let’s create a preset to assign/unassign FXA to the Main bus and to control
the Main output volume using an expression pedal on the FCB1010.
1. First press Pedal 6 to select Preset 6, making sure that Bank 00 is still selected.
Technical
Information
2. Press and hold the Down pedal to enter Preset Configuration
mode. (You’ll see a flashing green LED.)
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
52
Owner’s Manual
Scenes, Presets, System Menu, and MIDI Control
5
Using MIDI Control Mode to Remote-Control StudioLive 5.5
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
3. Press the Up pedal to confirm.
4. Press Pedal 6 so that the red LED is flashing.
Overview
5. Press the Up pedal to assign the Control Change.
6. Using Expression Pedal A, select CC 64.
Hookup
7. Press the Up pedal twice to confirm.
8. Press Pedal 8 so that its red LED is flashing.
9. Press the Up pedal to make the Control Change assignment.
Controls
10. Using Expression Pedal A, select CC 42.
11. Press the Up pedal once to select the lowest value.
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
12. Move Expression Pedal A to its lowest position to select 00.
13. Press the Up pedal once to select the highest value.
14. Move Expression Pedal A to its highest position to select 127.
15. Press the Up pedal once to confirm.
Connecting
to a
Computer
16. Press and hold the Down pedal to exit.
Preset 3 recalls “F20: High Ceilings” on FXA on your StudioLive.
••
Preset 6 allows you to control the Main bus assignment for FXA
(effectively muting and unmuting the effect in the Mains) from
Pedal 6 on your FCB1010. You also can control the Main output
volume for your StudioLive using Expression Pedal A.
Tutorials
••
Technical
Information
Preset 1 recalls Scene 2 on your StudioLive.
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
••
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Trying Out Presets
53
5
5.5
Scenes, Presets, System Menu, and MIDI Control
Using MIDI Control Mode to Remote-Control StudioLive
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
5.5.4
PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
Controlling the StudioLive 16.0.2 with a Roland FC-300
Overview
The Roland FC-300 Patch Mode offers many flexible ways for you to control your
StudioLive 16.0.2. Each patch allows you to assign multiple MIDI controls to any
of the four control pedals. In this example, we will create a patch that instantly
recalls a Scene, and we will assign to other pedals an FXA preset recall and
the FXA assignment to the Main bus. Finally, one expression pedal will control
the FXA output level, while the other will control the Main output volume.
Hookup
This tutorial will show you how to quickly configure your StudioLive 16.0.2 so that
you can control it with a Roland FC-300. The setup configuration detailed here is
just an example; you can customize your own setup using these simple steps.
Controls
Each section in this tutorial will focus on a particular setup area. In order for your
FCB1010 to control your StudioLive as described below, you must complete the
steps in each section of this tutorial. Once you have completed the tutorial, you
will have a new patch on your FC-300 that controls your StudioLive as follows:
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
••
CTL1: Recall Preset F10:Concrete Floors on FXA
••
CTL2: Assign/Unassign FXA to Main bus
••
Expression Pedal 1: FXA Output level
••
Expression Pedal 2: Main Output level
Setting Up Your StudioLive to be Controlled with MIDI
Connecting
to a
Computer
To begin, you must first setup your StudioLive to be remotely controlled by
your footpedal. In this example, we are setting up the StudioLive to receive
Scene changes on MIDI Channel 1, FXA preset changes on MIDI Channel 2,
and FXB preset changes on MIDI Channel 3. In general, you should set up your
StudioLive so that each library (Scene, FXA, FXB) is receiving Program Change
messages on its own MIDI channel. The danger of having, for example, Scene
Recall and FXA preset recall on the same MIDI channel is that when you change
to Scene 3, you will change the FXA preset to F3: Closet at the same time!
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
For our example, we also have the output levels and FXA/FXB Assign to Mains
on their own MIDI channel (Channel 4). For your setup, it is perfectly fine to have
these control share a MIDI channel with one of the recall groups. As previously
mentioned, these parameters are controlled using Control Change messages,
not Program Change messages, so there is no chance of a conflict—unless
you assign the same CC message to two different StudioLive parameters.
Tutorials
Besides setting your MIDI channels and Control Change messages, you
will also need to set MIDI Control Mode to On and make sure the MIDI
Source is set to the StudioLive’s MIDI Input. Section 7.5.8 will show you
how to control your StudioLive via FireWire using Studio One Artist.
Technical
Information
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
54
Owner’s Manual
Scenes, Presets, System Menu, and MIDI Control
5
Using MIDI Control Mode to Remote-Control StudioLive 5.5
Creating a New Patch on the Roland FC-300
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Now that your StudioLive is set up to communicate with your Roland FC-300, you will
need to create a new patch. Remember you must follow all of the steps in this tutorial
to control your StudioLive as previously described. At the end of this tutorial, we’ll
discuss how to name and save your new patch so you can use it again in the future.
Controls
Hookup
Overview
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Before setting up your FC-300, you must set up your StudioLive for
this example. Navigate to Pages 4 and 5 of your StudioLive system
menu and set each page up as shown in these images:
Instant Scene Recall
1. Press the Mode button until the Patch Mode LED is illuminated.
2. Making sure the red LED is illuminated on the first row
of pedals, depress Pedal 1/6. Press the right Parameter
button. The LCD will display “PATCH: On MIDI.”
Connecting
to a
Computer
3. Press the Write button so that the LCD displays “Edit MIDI.”
4. Press the Write button again. You will see “001: ----- -----.“
6. Press the Value Up button so that the LCD displays “001:PC CH#01 PC#001.”
7. The first field defaults to Program Change (“PC”). This is how the
StudioLive recalls Scenes, so you can leave this field as it is.
8. Use the right Parameter button to move to the
next field: MIDI channel number.
9. Set the MIDI channel to 1.
Technical
Information
10. Use the right Parameter button to move to the next field: Program Change
number. The number you enter will determine which Scene will be recalled.
Tutorials
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
5. Press the right Parameter button.
11. Use the Value Up button to set the Program Change number to 002.
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
12. Press the Exit button twice and continue to FXA Preset Recall.
55
5
5.5
Scenes, Presets, System Menu, and MIDI Control
Using MIDI Control Mode to Remote-Control StudioLive
PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
FXA Preset Recall
1. Next we will set CTL Pedal 1 to recall a preset on FXA. Press the
right Parameter button until the LCD displays “CTL1: On MIDI.”
Overview
2. Press the Write button so that the LCD displays “Edit MIDI.”
3. Press the Write button again. You will see “001: ----- -----.“
Hookup
4. Press the right Parameter button.
5. Press the Value Up button so that the LCD displays “001:PC CH#01 PC#001.”
Controls
6. The first field defaults to Program Change (“PC”). This is how the
StudioLive recalls FX presets, so you can leave this field as it is.
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
7. Use the right Parameter button to move to the
next field: MIDI channel number.
8. Set the MIDI channel to 2.
9. Use the right Parameter button to move to the next
field: Program Change number. The number you enter
will determine which FX Preset will be recalled.
10. Use the Value Up button to set the Program Change number to 10.
Connecting
to a
Computer
11. Press the Exit button twice and continue to FXA Assign/Unassign to Mains.
FXA Assign/Unassign to Mains
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Next, we will set CTL Pedal 2 to control the Main assignment (“mute”) for FXA.
1. Press the right Parameter button until the LCD reads “CTL2: Assign.”
2. The curser should be on the CH# Tx field. Press the Value
Down button until the MIDI channel value is “04.”
3. Use the right Parameter button to navigate to the CC# field.
Tutorials
4. Use the Value Up and Down buttons to set the Control Change number to 64.
5. Continue to FXA and Main Bus Output Levels.
Technical
Information
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
56
Scenes, Presets, System Menu, and MIDI Control
5
Using MIDI Control Mode to Remote-Control StudioLive 5.5
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
FXA and Main Bus Output Levels
1. Press the right Parameter button until the LCD reads “EXP1: Assign.”
Overview
2. Use the right Parameter button to navigate to the CH# Tx field and
press the Value Down button until the MIDI channel value is “04.”
3. Use the right Parameter button to navigate to the CC# field.
4. Use the Value Up and Down buttons to set the Control Change number to 40.
5. Press the right Parameter button until the LCD reads “EXP2: Assign.”
Controls
6. Use the right Parameter button to navigate to the CH# Tx field and
press the Value Down button until the MIDI channels value is “04.”
Hookup
Owner’s Manual
8. Use the Value Up and Down buttons to set the Control Change number to 42.
9. Continue to Naming and Saving Your Patch.
Naming and Saving Your Patch
Connecting
to a
Computer
1. Press the right Parameter button until the LCD reads “Patch Name.”
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
7. Use the right Parameter button to navigate to the CC# field.
2. Use the Value Up and Down buttons and left/right Parameter
buttons to enter a name (such as “My Preset”).
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
3. Press the Exit button. You will now be on the Main screen of the LCD.
4. Press the Write button so that the LCD displays “Write to [WRITE] 01:”
5. In this example, we will save to patch-library position 01
but you can also use the Value buttons to scroll to an empty
patch position. Press the Write button again to store.
6. Press the Write button again to confirm.
Tutorials
Recalling StudioLive Scenes
CTL1: Recall Preset F10: Concrete Floors on FXA
••
CTL2: Assign/Unassign FXA to Main bus
••
Expression Pedal 1: FXA Output level
••
Expression Pedal 2: Main Output level
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
••
Technical
Information
Making sure the red LED is illuminated on the first row of pedals,
depress Pedal 1/6. You will see that Scene 2 has been recalled on your
StudioLive. You are now ready to control your StudioLive as follows:
57
6
6.1
Connecting to a Computer
System Requirements
PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
6.0 Connecting to a Computer
Overview
The StudioLive 16.0.2 is more than just a mixer. It’s also a very powerful
computer interface that allows you to record all your mixer inputs. You
can even control the mixer from a computer, using Virtual StudioLive.
6.1
System Requirements
Hookup
Below are the minimum computer-system requirements for your
Studio One Artist, Virtual StudioLive, and Capture software.*
Macintosh®
Controls
•• Operating Systems:
••
Mac OS® X 10.6 or higher
•• Hardware:
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
••
Minimum: Intel Core 1 Solo 1.5 GHz processor, 1 GB RAM
••
Recommended: Intel Core Duo, or Intel Xeon processor, 2 GB or more RAM
Windows®
•• Operating Systems:
Connecting
to a
Computer
••
Windows XP (SP2 or greater) 32-bit and 64-bit
••
Windows Vista 32-bit and 64-bit
••
Windows 7 32-bit and 64-bit
•• Hardware:
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
••
inimum: Intel Pentium 4 1.6 GHz processor or AMD
M
Athlon 64 3000+ (Turion) , 1 GB RAM
••
ecommended: Intel Pentium 4 2.8 GHz EM64T or better or
R
AMD Athlon 64 XP 3000+ or better, 2 GB or more RAM
NOTE: The speed of your processor, amount of RAM, and capacity, size, and speed of your hard
drives will greatly affect the overall performance of your recording system. A faster processor
and more RAM can reduce signal latency (delay) and improve overall performance.
*Subject to change. Check www.presonus.com for updates.
Tutorials
Technical
Information
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
58
Connecting to a Computer
6
Installation for Windows 6.2
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Installation for Windows
Overview
After you insert the Installation CD into your CD-ROM drive, the StudioLive
installer will take you through each step of the installation process. Please read
each message carefully to ensure the StudioLive driver is properly installed.
It is especially important that you not connect your StudioLive too soon!
Hookup
e made the StudioLive installer as simple and easy to follow as
W
possible. Before beginning the StudioLive installation setup, please
close all applications, including antivirus software, and disconnect the
StudioLive from your computer. After the installation is successfully
completed, don‘t forget to reenable your antivirus protection!
Controls
If you see any Windows Security alerts, click “Install
this driver software anyway” (Vista) or “Continue
anyway” (XP).
Follow the onscreen instructions to complete
the installation. When the installer has finished,
it will prompt you to reboot your computer.
Technical
Information
Tutorials
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Connecting
to a
Computer
Click “Finish” to automatically restart your PC. Once
your computer has rebooted, connect the StudioLive.
When the Found New Hardware wizard launches,
follow the recommended steps. Your StudioLive is
now synced to your computer and ready to use!
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
6.2
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Owner’s Manual
59
6
6.3
PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
Connecting to a Computer
Installation for Mac OSX
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
6.3
Installation for Mac OS X
Overview
After inserting the Installation CD into your disc drive, browse the disc
and run the StudioLive installer, which will take you through each step
of the installation process. Please read each message carefully, and be
especially careful that you do not connect your StudioLive too soon.
1. You will be directed to the Welcome screen. Click
“Continue” and follow the onscreen instructions.
Hookup
Controls
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
2. You will be directed to choose the hard drive onto
which you want to install the drivers and Universal
Control software. You must choose your system drive;
storage drives and partitions cannot be used as hosts
for the driver.
Connecting
to a
Computer
When installation is completed, you will find the
Universal Control program in your Applications folder.
It is recommended that you place this in your Dock.
Click “Install.”
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
3. When installation is completed, your computer will
restart. Once it has rebooted, connect your StudioLive
to your Mac with a FireWire cable and power it on. You
are now ready to use your StudioLive!
Tutorials
Technical
Information
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
60
Owner’s Manual
Connecting to a Computer
6
Using the StudioLive as an Audio Interface 6.4
Using the StudioLive as an Audio Interface
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
6.4
Hookup
6.4.1
Overview
Your StudioLive features a 16x16 FireWire interface. Any input can be recorded
with any audio-recording application that supports Core Audio or ASIO.
Please consult the documentation that came with your audio application
for specific instructions on how to select the StudioLive driver as the audiodevice driver for your software. It is important to note that your StudioLive uses
the same driver as the PreSonus FireStudio family of interfaces, so its driver
will be displayed as “PreSonus FireStudio” in all driver-selection menus.
Using the StudioLive with Popular Audio Applications
Controls
Complete setup instructions for PreSonus Studio One Artist and a brief
tutorial on its features are located in Section 7.5 of this manual. Below are
basic driver-setup instructions for four popular audio applications.
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Apple Logic Pro/Express 7+:
1. Launch Logic Pro/Express.
2. Go to Logic | Preferences | Audio.
3. Click on the Devices Tab.
4. On the Core Audio tab, check Enabled.
5. Select PreSonus FireStudio from the device menu.
7. Your StudioLive features custom I/O labels for faster workflow.
To enable these labels for use in Logic, go to Options | Audio | I/O Labels.
8. The second column in the pop-up window will be named “Provided by Driver.” Activate each of these labels for your StudioLive. When you are done, close this window.
9. You are now ready to use your StudioLive.
Steinberg Cubase 4+
1. Launch Cubase.
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Connecting
to a
Computer
6. You will be asked if you’d like to relaunch Logic. Click “try (re)launch.”
Tutorials
2. Go to Devices | Device Setup.
3. Select “VST Audio System” from the Devices column in the Device Setup.
Technical
Information
4. Select PreSonus FireStudio from the ASIO Driver dropdown list.
5. Click “Switch” to begin using the StudioLive driver.
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
6. Once you have successfully changed the driver, go to Devices |
VST Connections to enable your input and output buses.
61
6
6.4
Connecting to a Computer
Using the StudioLive as an Audio Interface
PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Cakewalk Sonar 6+
1. Launch Sonar.
2. Go to Options | Audio... and click on the Advanced tab.
Overview
3. Change the Driver Mode to “ASIO.” (Using WDM rather than
ASIO for pro-audio applications is not recommended.)
4. Click the “OK” button.
Hookup
5. Restart Sonar.
6. Go to Options | Audio... and click on the Drivers tab.
7. Highlight all input and output drivers beginning with “PreSonus FireStudio.”
Controls
8. Go to Options | Audio... and click on the General tab.
9. Set the Playback Timing Master to “PreSonus FireStudio ... DAW Out 1.”
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
10.Set the Recording Timing Master to “PreSonus FireStudio ... Mic/Inst 1.”
Ableton Live 5+
1. Launch Ableton Live
2. Go to Options | Preferences | Audio
3. Choose Driver Type: Asio | Audio Device: ASIO PreSonus FireStudio
Connecting
to a
Computer
4. Go to Input Config : Enable and select the desired Input channels.
5. Go to Output Config : Enable and select the desired Output channels.
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
6. You may now select the StudioLive’s inputs and outputs for each track created in Live.
Tutorials
Technical
Information
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
62
Connecting to a Computer
6
Using the StudioLive as an Audio Interface 6.4
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
FireWire Sends and Returns
Overview
When using the StudioLive as an audio interface, it is important to understand
the terms “FireWire send” and “FireWire return.” Because the audio interface
in the StudioLive is completely integrated with the other functions of
the mixer, the FireWire I/O is designed to work as an independent bus.
You can route (send) signals from other buses to the FireWire bus, and
its output (return) signal is hard-coded to designated mixer channels.
Your StudioLive 16.0.2 has 16 available sends and 16 returns.
Hookup
FireWire sends 1 through 16 are hard-coded to be sent pre-fader from the 16
input channels of the StudioLive. Unlike the mix bus on your StudioLive, the
FireWire sends of the right inputs of each of the Stereo channels (channels 10, 12,
14, and 16) are active whether or not Stereo Link is engaged for that channel.
Each of the 16 sends can be pre- or post-Fat Channel EQ and dynamics processing. To
record the EQ and dynamics processing on any channel, simply enable the Dig Out
button. It will illuminate, indicating that the Fat Channel signal path is being routed
to the FireWire send. If this mode is not enabled, the signal sent via FireWire will be
post-trim, phantom power, and phase reverse (if applicable).
Each of the StudioLive’s 16 inputs are hard-coded to receive their respective FireWire
returns. Outputs 1 through 16 in your recording application route these playback
streams to their respective channels on the StudioLive (that is, the software’s Output
1 always goes to StudioLive Channel 1 input and so on). Once you route a track in
your recording application to play through one of these outputs, it will always be
accessible on its channel by simply pressing its FireWire Return button.
As discussed in Section 4.5.1, you must first engage FireWire
Return Mode before you are able to use the Multimode buttons
to engage/disengage a FireWire Return on a channel.
Tutorials
The FireWire returns to the stereo channels behave just as the analog
inputs do. So, if you have Channel 11/12 unlinked, only FireWire return
11 will be heard on that channel. Once you engage Stereo Link for
Channel 11/12, both FireWire returns 11 and 12 will be heard.
Connecting
to a
Computer
Power User Tip: When the Flexible Input pair is set to record the Main mix, you
can still connect a microphone or instrument to analog inputs 15 and 16 and use
them in your mix; however, they cannot be recorded as individual tracks.
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Controls
The exception to this are FireWire sends 15/16. These FireWire sends
are Flexible Inputs and can be set to record either the analog signal
on inputs 15 and 16 on the back of your StudioLive or the Main mix.
Section 7.2.5 discusses how to assign these Flexible Input Sends
Technical
Information
POWER USER TIP: It is important to think of your FireWIre returns and your analog inputs
the same way. When a FireWire return is engaged, it replaces the analog input in the mix.
You can process in the Fat Channel, include in Aux mixes, and send to an FX mix.
To provide the most flexible mixing environment, the main mix output for any
application should be assigned to Outputs 1 and 2. These FireWire returns are
hard-coded both to Channels 1 and 2 and to the FireWire input buttons in the
Monitor section of the StudioLive. In this way, you can monitor the main output
from your recording application without using two channels on your StudioLive,
leaving the other 16 outputs available to be routed to the Fat Channel or for
inserting a plug-in on a live instrument (see the next section for more details).
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
6.4.2
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Owner’s Manual
63
6
6.4
Connecting to a Computer
Using the StudioLive as an Audio Interface
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
6.4.3
PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
Using Plug-in Effects as Inserts
Overview
FireWire streaming on your StudioLive is continuously bidirectional. This means
that the StudioLive is always sending signals from the direct FireWire sends on
all 16 input channels. At the same time, the StudioLive is receiving signals back
from the 16 FireWire returns. Because the FireWire returns always come back
to their respective StudioLive channels, you can quickly insert a plug-in from
your recording application into any channel strip and monitor it in real time.
Hookup
In this example, we will insert the Beat Delay plug-in from
PreSonus Studio One onto Channel 1 of the StudioLive.
Controls
1. To begin, create a mono audio track in Studio One. Assign its input to Channel 1 and
its output to Output 1. (Several DAW applications, including Apple Logic™, do not
offer mono output buses. If this is the case, you must route the output stream to
Channels 1-2 and pan the channel all the way to the left so that it will only be sent
to Output 1. Please consult your software’s user manual for specific instructions.)
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
2. Once you have the routing set up in Studio One,
drag-and-drop the Beat Delay plug-in onto your track
and record-enable it. Software monitoring will be
enabled automatically.
Connecting
to a
Computer
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
3. Press the FireWire Return Mode button on your StudioLive, and then press Channel
1’s MultiMode button of your StudioLive. You can now monitor your analog signal
with your inserted effect as you record from any of the output buses on the
StudioLive.
Tutorials
Technical
Information
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
64
Connecting to a Computer
6
Using the StudioLive as an Audio Interface 6.4
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
A Quick Note About Printing Fat Channel Dynamics and EQ
Controls
Hookup
Overview
You probably will want to use the Fat Channel dynamics processing and EQ during
post-production. The question is how to print these changes to your recording.
An easy way to do this is by recording the Main bus using the Flexible Inputs.
Begin by routing a playback stream to an individual channel on the StudioLive
from within your recording application. With the FireWire return selected as the
signal source for that channel, press and hold SIP and solo the channel, so that
only that channel is routed to the Main Mix. You can then process the playback
stream through the Fat Channel for both the individual channel and for the Main
Mix. In your recording software, assign Inputs 15 and 16 as an input source for
a new track and record it. The unprocessed track can then either be removed
from the session or used in tandem with the processed track as an effect. The
flexible routing and mixing capability of the StudioLive provides you with an
arsenal of tools previously unavailable to “in the box” mixes. Don’t be afraid to
test the limits of modern mixing techniques and to create a few of your own!
Note: The Dig Out button does not function when you have a FireWire return selected
as an input source. If Dig Out is enabled, any aux, subgroup, and the main bus to
which the return is routed will not receive the post-Fat Channel signal. The
unprocessed signal will still be routed to these buses, as well as to the FireWire bus,
but the Fat Channel processing will not.
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
Technical
Information
Tutorials
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Connecting
to a
Computer
If you wish to add Fat Channel processing to a FireWire return, you must
disable Dig Out.
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Owner’s Manual
65
7
7.1
Software: Universal Control, SL Remote, Capture, and Studio One Artist PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
Universal Control
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
7.0 Software: Universal Control with VSL, StudioLive
Remote for iPad®, Capture, and Studio One Artist
Overview
Your StudioLive 16.0.2 comes with a powerful software
bundle that provides everything you need to record live
and in the studio, produce and mix an album, and back up,
restore, and organize your user Scenes and presets.
Hookup
7.1
Universal Control
Controls
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Connecting
to a
Computer
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Tutorials
StudioLive 16.0.2 integrates tightly with the Universal Control
control-panel application. Universal Control includes two windows:
the Launcher window and the Device window. For the StudioLive,
the Device window is the Virtual StudioLive (VSL) application. VSL
provides bidirectional control of channel, Aux bus, and Main bus
levels; Fat Channel parameters; Aux mixes; effects; and the graphic
EQ. It also provides a visual overview of your StudioLive settings
so that you can see, adjust, and organize them. VSL includes a
librarian, allowing you to easily manage your presets and Scenes.
Technical
Information
Controlling your StudioLive with VSL is as easy as drag-and-drop. Load Fat
Channel presets and scenes by simply dragging them onto the channel or
mixer overview. You can load Fat Channel presets as a complete channel
strip or as individual gate, compressor, and EQ presets. Through VSL,
you can back up all of the Scenes and presets stored on your StudioLive.
These stored settings can be loaded from disk or sent to, and stored
internally on, the StudioLive. You can even drag presets out of the
browser and email, IM, or disk-swap them with other StudioLive owners.
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
Since control is bidirectional, fader moves and parameter
66
Owner’s Manual
S oftware: Universal Control, SL Remote, Capture, and Studio One Artist7
Universal Control 7.1
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
changes made on the StudioLive are reflected in VSL. So, for
example, you can set up the StudioLive the way you want
it and then save your Scene or other presets in VSL.
Overview
VSL also lets you create a password for your StudioLive so that you
can lock out unauthorized users. (See Section 7.2.6 for details.) From
the Launcher window, you can set basic parameters such as buffer
size and sample rate. In addition, you can use the Launcher window
to configure your WDM outputs (PC only; see Section 6.4.4).
Set the sample rate to 44.1 or 48 kHz from the Launcher window when
your StudioLive is connected to a computer.
A higher sample rate will increase the fidelity of the
recording. It will also increase the file size and the amount
of system resources necessary to process the audio.
To ensure the safety of the audio equipment connected to it, the
StudioLive will mute all post-converter outputs for two seconds when
the sample rate is changed or when the mixer is connecting to a
computer. This includes the main and the control-room outputs, as well
as the Aux and Subgroup outputs. While this offers a good measure
of protection to your sound system, it could put the brakes on a live
show. Because of this, it very important that the sample rate be selected
and locked in prior to beginning any recording or performance.
Clock Source
Changes the Clock Source for Chained FireStudio-family Devices.
The StudioLive cannot slave to an external clock. However, if you are
cascading it with FireStudio-family products that do feature digital inputs,
the clock source becomes selectable.
Tutorials
The clock source setting will determine where the device chain is
receiving word-clock information. This keeps the chained devices
in sync with other digital devices and with each other. The menu
options are determined by the available digital inputs in the chain.
In general, you will want the StudioLive to be your Master
Clock, in which case set the clock to StudioLive-Internal.
Technical
Information
Changes How the StudioLive Driver’s Buffer Size is Set.
Normal Mode: Input and Output buffers are both identical to the Buffer
Size setting.
Safe Mode 1-3: Increases the output buffer size for added stability.
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
Operation Mode
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Changes StudioLive Sample Rate.
Connecting
to a
Computer
Sample Rate Selector
Controls
Universal Control: Launch Window
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
7.1.1
Hookup
Note that the Meter Style and Meter Decay options in the Launcher window
are not active when only a StudioLive is connected to a computer.
67
7
7.1
Software: Universal Control, SL Remote, Capture, and Studio One Artist PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
Universal Control
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Buffer Size Selector (PC only)
Changes the StudioLive Buffer Size.
Overview
You can set the buffer size from 64 to 4,096 samples. The buffer size
determines the round-trip time it takes audio data to be converted from
analog to digital and back to analog. As a general rule, the higher the
buffer size, the better the system performance, but the less playable
virtual instruments and the like become. In general, 512 samples (11 to 12
milliseconds) will provide you with a large enough buffer for optimum
system performance, but low enough to be unobtrusive. You should set
your buffer size and sample rate prior to launching your host application.
Hookup
On the Mac, the buffer size is set from inside your host application.
Device Window Button
Opens the Device Window.
Controls
Click on this button to open Virtual StudioLive.
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
To give your StudioLive a custom name, double-click on the
default label (StudioLive) to open a text field. When you have
finished entering your custom name, hit the Enter key.
File Menu
Opens and Closes Launch and Device Windows.
From the File menu of the Launch Window, you can open and close both
windows, as well as quit the Universal Control application.
Close Window. Closes just the Launch window.
Show All Devices. Opens the Device window for all of the connected FireStudio-family interfaces.
Connecting
to a
Computer
Close All Devices. Closes the Device window for all
of the connected FireStudio-family interfaces.
Quit. Quits the Universal Control application.
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Settings: Check Firmware
Scans Your StudioLive and Updates the Firmware.
A firmware updater is built into the Universal Control application.
Periodically, a driver update will require that the firmware on your
StudioLive be updated. Whenever you install an update for the Universal
Control or add a new FireStudio-family product to your system, you
should use this feature to ensure that the firmware is up to date. If the
firmware needs to be updated, the update application will launch
automatically.
Tutorials
The firmware updater can also be used to reset your StudioLive
16.0.2 to factory default. To reset your StudioLive, hold down the
CTRL and ALT [OPTION] keys while clicking on “Check Firmware.”
This will force the Firmware updater to run. Once the firmware
updater has finished, select “Reset” rather than “Restore.”
Technical
Information
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
68
Owner’s Manual
The StudioLive features advanced WDM features. From this menu you can
choose which FireWire return you’d like to use for your computer’s main
output. Because FireWire returns 1 and 2 are hard-coded to the FireWire
Return button in the Monitor bus, we suggest that you use these returns.
By default, the main output for your computer is set to FireWire returns 1
and 2, so no additional effort is required.
VSL: Virtual StudioLive
Hookup
7.2
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Opens the WDM Channel Mapper.
Overview
Settings: WDM Setup
S oftware: Universal Control, SL Remote, Capture, and Studio One Artist7
VSL: Virtual StudioLive 7.2
Controls
VSL is a highly advanced editor/librarian and control application
that is completely integrated with the StudioLive 16.0.2. Because
of the continuous bidirectional communication between
StudioLive and VSL, whatever you do on the StudioLive‘s
control surface will be reflected in VSL and vice versa.
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Connecting
to a
Computer
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
VSL for StudioLive 16.0.2 requires a minimum
screen resolution of 1024x768 dpi.
Tutorials
VSL: Browser
Technical
Information
When you first launch VSL, notice the Browser window along the right
side of the screen. The Browser in VSL functions similarly to the Browser
in Studio One. From the Browser, you can see all of the Scenes, Fat
Channel presets, FX presets, and graphic EQ settings that are saved
on your StudioLive and on your computer. You can also create new
settings and can back up your entire library from this window. Simply
drag-and-drop a Scene or preset to load it on your StudioLive.
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
7.2.1
69
7
7.2
Software: Universal Control, SL Remote, Capture, and Studio One Artist PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
VSL: Virtual StudioLive
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Get Button
Transfers All Scenes, Fat Channel, FX, and Graphic EQ Presets Stored on the
StudioLive to VSL.
Overview
When you first launch VSL, you will need to create a
link between your StudioLive‘s internal memory and
your computer. To do this, click on the Get button.
Hookup
A dialog will open, prompting you to click the Transfer
button. Any settings that are temporarily stored in the
local cache (i.e., settings that are currently visible in
the Device Memory section of the Browser window)
will be overwritten.
Controls
Add to Disk Button
Transfers all Scenes, Fat Channel, FX, and Graphic EQ Presets from Temporary
Memory to the Permanent Cache.
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
VSL allows you to back up your Scenes, Fat Channel, FX, and graphic EQ
presets and permanently store them on your computer. Each type of
preset can be added separately. In this way, you can back up only what
you want, when you want.
To move a Scene or preset from temporary memory into permanent
memory, simply select one preset or Scene and click the Add to Disk
button. To select multiple presets, hold the Shift key while making your
selections.
Connecting
to a
Computer
Browser Tab Buttons
Displays the Different Preset Categories on the StudioLive and on the Computer.
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
All of your Scenes and presets are contained in dedicated folders in VSL.
To view a specific set of presets, simply click on its tab.
•• SCENE. Displays stored Scenes.
•• FAT CH. Displays stored Fat Channel presets.
•• FX. Displays stored effects presets.
•• GEQ. Displays graphic EQ presets.
•• BACKUP Displays any backup logs that have been created in VSL.
Tutorials
Technical
Information
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
70
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Transfers Designated Scenes, Fat Channel, FX, and Graphic EQ Presets from VSL
to StudioLive Memory.
A dialog will open asking you to verify that you would
like to overwrite the Scene or preset at the new
position. This will not immediately overwrite what
is stored internally on your StudioLive; it will merely
overwrite what is stored in the VSL cache memory.
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Add New Button
Controls
Once you have organized the files you wish to
transfer to your StudioLive, press the Send button.
When the transfer is complete, you can disconnect
your StudioLive from your computer and take
your chosen Scenes and presets with you.
Creates a New Scene or Preset.
In the On the Disk and Device Memory sections of the
Browser, you will see the Add New button. Clicking
this button will immediately create a new Scene or
preset. If you want this new preset to be temporarily
stored in VSL and immediately sent to the StudioLive‘s
internal memory, add the new preset in the Device
Memory section. If you would prefer to have this new
preset stored in permanent memory on your
computer, use the Add New button in the On the Disk
section. In either case, the new preset can be sent to
your StudioLive at any time.
Deletes a Stored Scene or Preset.
Technical
Information
Tutorials
In the On the Disk section of the Browser, notice the
Remove button. Clicking this button will delete the
currently selected, stored Scenes or presets.
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
Remove Button
Hookup
Overview
VSL makes reorganizing all the Scenes and presets stored on
your StudioLive as easy as dragging-and-dropping a file. To load
your StudioLive with new Scenes and presets, simply drag any
Scene or preset from the On the Disk section of the Browser to
any position in the Device Memory section of the Browser.
Connecting
to a
Computer
Send Button
S oftware: Universal Control, SL Remote, Capture, and Studio One Artist7
VSL: Virtual StudioLive 7.2
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Owner’s Manual
71
7
7.2
Software: Universal Control, SL Remote, Capture, and Studio One Artist PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
VSL: Virtual StudioLive
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Backup Tab
Creates and Restores Backups of Your StudioLive.
Overview
The Backup tab allows you to create complete timestamped snapshots of your StudioLive. This can be
especially useful when completing a project that may
need to be revisited in the future. To create a backup,
simply click on the Backup button.
Hookup
To restore any backup file, select it in the On the
Disk portion of the Browser and click the Restore
button. You will be warned that any Scene or preset
currently loaded in the Device Memory section of
the Browser will be overwritten. Once your backup
is restored, you can click the Send button to transfer
your Scenes and presets back to the StudioLive.
Controls
Show/Hide Browser
Displays/Hides the Browser Window.
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
The Browser can be hidden from view to provide more real-estate for your
mix. Simply click on the “Hide Browser” button to close the Browser.
To reopen the Browser, click on the “Show Browser” button in the upper
right corner of your VSL window.
Connecting
to a
Computer
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Tutorials
Technical
Information
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
72
Owner’s Manual
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
VSL: Overview Tab
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Controls
Hookup
Overview
7.2.2
S oftware: Universal Control, SL Remote, Capture, and Studio One Artist7
VSL: Virtual StudioLive 7.2
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Connecting
to a
Computer
At the top of the VSL window, you will see four tabs: Overview,
Channel, GEQ, and Setup. The Overview tab provides you with a
complete graphical representation of your StudioLive. As you adjust
parameters on the StudioLive, you will notice that the VSL overview
is also updated. If you use your mouse to adjust a parameter in VSL,
the StudioLive will be updated remotely. It is important to remember
that every button, knob, slider, and fader on the VSL corresponds
directly to a button, knob, slider, or fader on your StudioLive.
The graphic above identifies each controller, labeled with its
corresponding control on the StudioLive, and can be used as
a map to quickly learn how to navigate the Overview tab.
The Overview Tab also provides you with a look at the send levels of every
channel on your StudioLive to every Aux output and FX bus.
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
Technical
Information
To quickly set up an Aux mix, use your mouse to set the send level
for Channel 1. Right-click on the Channel 1 send level and sweep
your mouse across the other channel sends for that Aux. The
send level will be copied to every other channel for that Aux.
Tutorials
Aux Sends
73
7
7.2
Software: Universal Control, SL Remote, Capture, and Studio One Artist PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
VSL: Virtual StudioLive
VSL: Channel Tab
Overview
The Channel tab provides a detailed overview of the Fat Channel
parameters for the selected channel. The selected channel will always
be shown above the Gate section. It is important to remember
that you have continuous bidirectional control. If you wish to
grab a point in the EQ with your mouse, for example, you will be
changing the parameters both in VSL and on your StudioLive.
Hookup
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
7.2.3
To access the Fat Channel for FXA and FXB, you will need to press
its Select button on the StudioLive. You can then load presets and
make adjustments using VSL from within the Channel tab.
Controls
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
7.2.4
Loading Scenes and Presets from VSL
Connecting
to a
Computer
As stated in the previous section, the Browser window in VSL
functions much in the same way as the Browser in Studio One.
This means that to load a Scene or preset from the Browser
window, you simply select it and drag it over the mixer or channel
on which you wish to load it. Scenes and presets can be dragged
from either the On Disk or the Device Memory section of the
Browser and dropped onto the Overview or the Channel tab.
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Loading a Scene
Tutorials
To load a new Scene on your StudioLive, select it from the Browser
window and drag it over the mixer in either the Overview or the Channel
tab. The window will gray out indicating that a new Scene is about to be
loaded. Please note: Only the parameters that have been enabled for
recall on the StudioLive will be recalled on the mixer.
See Section 5.1 for more details.
Technical
Information
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
74
Owner’s Manual
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
S oftware: Universal Control, SL Remote, Capture, and Studio One Artist7
VSL: Virtual StudioLive 7.2
Loading Scribble Strip Labels
Loading an Entire Fat Channel Preset
To load an FX preset, select it from the Browser window and drag it over
any part of the desired FX bus in the Master section of the Overview tab.
Once the preset is loaded, you can use the FX Type menu to change the
effect and create new presets.
Tutorials
Note: At this time, VSL does not transfer the name of the preset to the
StudioLive All FX presets loaded from within VSL will be labeled “Natural” in
the FX menu on your StudioLive.
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Loading an FX Preset
Connecting
to a
Computer
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
To load every component in a Fat Channel preset (Gate, Compressor, EQ),
select it from the Browser window and drag it over any part of the desired
channel. If you drag it over any of the component Quick Views, it will load
only that component; for example, if you drag a preset over the Gate
Quick View, only the Gate will be loaded.
Controls
Hookup
Overview
Scribble Strip labels are stored with your Scenes. You can load just the
labels by selecting the Scene from the Browser window and dragging it
over the row of Scribble Strips above the Channel Faders. The Scribble
Strips will gray out, indicating that the Scribble Strip labels from the
Scene are about to be loaded.
75
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
To load a graphic EQ preset, select it from the Browser window and drag it
over any part of the focused graphic EQ. Graphic EQ presets can be
loaded on the Overtab or the GEQ tab. Once it is loaded, you can use the
sliders in VSL or the encoders on the StudioLive to make adjustments.
Note that in order to use the encoders on your StudioLive to control a
graphic EQ in VSL, you must be in the GEQ menu page for the graphic EQ
you wish to control. See next section for details.
Technical
Information
Loading a GEQ Preset
7
7.2
Software: Universal Control, SL Remote, Capture, and Studio One Artist PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
VSL: Virtual StudioLive
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
7.2.5
VSL: Setup Tab
Overview
The Setup Tab provides access to key system parameters. From the
Setup tab, you can define which Recalling Filters are enabled, set all
parameters for MIDI Control Mode, select the source for the Flexible
Inputs pair, and create a password with which to lock your StudioLive.
Hookup
Controls
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Flexible Inputs Router
As discussed in Section 6.4.2, the StudioLive allows you to choose
between recording analog Input 15 and 16 or the Main Bus. This is
done via the Flexible Inputs Router on the Setup tab. By default, your
StudioLive is configured to record inputs 15 and 16 on FireWire Sends
15 and 16. To record the Main Bus mix instead, simply repatch the Main
Bus to FireWire Sends 15 and 16 using the Flexible Inputs Router.
Connecting
to a
Computer
The Main Bus is automatically set to send its signal post-Fat
Channel dynamics and post-EQ (where applicable). No matter
which source is selected in the Flexible Inputs Router, you
will see Inputs 15 and 16 in your recording application.
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
MIDI Control Mode Menu
MIDI Control Mode is a powerful feature that allows you to control key
StudioLive parameters remotely, using a MIDI Controller.
See Section 5.5 for complete details.
Scene Recall Menu
Tutorials
As discussed in Section 5.1, your StudioLive allows you to decide which
group of parameters you would like to recall with a Scene. The Scene
Recall menu on the Setup tab corresponds directly with the Scene Recall
menu in your StudioLive.
Technical
Information
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
76
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Enabling Lockout Mode
Overview
Your StudioLive features a Lockout mode that allows you to
temporarily disable nearly every feature on the StudioLive,
although analog features (such as input-trim knobs,
faders, cue and monitor levels) can still be adjusted.
Hookup
Because of this, after unlocking your StudioLive, and before
resuming mixing, you should take a quick glance at your
input trims and output levels. If you have locked your fader
position, you will be able to recall your pre-lockout fader
positions using the Locate button in the meter section.
4. To lock your StudioLive, press the System button in the Digital Effects |
Master Control section and navigate to Page 6: Lockout. Your StudioLive
cannot be locked unless this page is active. If you have two StudioLive
mixers linked, you only need to lock the Master unit to lock both mixers
in the chain.
At its lowest level of security, Lockout mode allows you to freeze the
current Fat Channel and effects settings. Faders, Aux mixing, and
Scene recall can still be enabled. Each of these mix functions can be
added to Lockout mode. To lock your StudioLive, press the Select
buttons that correspond to the 5-digit password you have set. In
this example, the password is 12345, so you would press the Select
buttons for Channels 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5, in that order. The Panel Status
will switch to Locked, indicating that Lockout mode is now active.
To unlock your StudioLive, navigate back to Page 4: Lockout in
the System menu, if this page is not currently active. Press the
same sequence of Select buttons. The Panel Status will change
to Unlocked, and you will be able to resume your mix.
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Connecting
to a
Computer
3. To set your custom password, click on the box next to “Device is
Lockable.” At this point, a cursor will appear in the password box. Enter
a 5-digit code, using any number between 1 and 9, and click the Set
button. Your password will no longer be displayed. Should you need to
change your password, simply click on the box next to “Device is
Lockable.” Your old password will be deleted, and you will be able to
enter a new password. Once you have set your password, the
StudioLive can be locked with or without being synced to a computer.
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
2. Click on the Lock Out button.
Tutorials
1. With your StudioLive connected and synced to your computer, launch
VSL and click on the Setup tab.
Controls
Until you connect your StudioLive to a computer, the mixer cannot
be locked, so don’t worry about accidentally locking yourself out.
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
7.2.6
S oftware: Universal Control, SL Remote, Capture, and Studio One Artist7
VSL: Virtual StudioLive 7.2
Technical
Information
Owner’s Manual
77
7
7.3
Software: Universal Control, SL Remote, Capture, and Studio One Artist PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
Using StudioLive Remote for iPad
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
7.2.7
Remote-Controlling StudioLive with VSL
Overview
Virtual StudioLive allows you to control almost every parameter
in your StudioLive remotely from your desktop or laptop
computer. Your StudioLive will reflect every change made in
VSL, including fader movements. This means that if you move
Channel 11/12’s fader in VSL, you will hear the level set in VSL in
your mix, rather than the level represented by the current physical
position of the Channel 11/12 fader on your StudioLive.
Hookup
To sync the faders on your StudioLive with the faders in VSL,
simply press the Locate button on your StudioLive. The Fat
Channel meters on your StudioLive will reflect the current position
of each fader in VSL. While in Locate Mode, the faders on your
StudioLive will not control the level of each channel, so you will
not hear level changes while you recall each fader position. Once
you exit Locate mode, your StudioLive faders will reactivate.
Controls
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
You also can use a wireless device (such as a laptop, iPad, or iPhone)
to control VSL. It is important to note that your StudioLive must be
connected and synced to a computer with a FireWire 400 connection.
Once you establish a wireless network between this computer and your
wireless device, you can use a VPN application to remotely control VSL.
Please contact your computer’s and/or wireless device’s
supporting documentation or manufacturer to learn
more about VPN and wireless-network creation.
Connecting
to a
Computer
7.3
Using StudioLive Remote for iPad
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
StudioLive Remote for iPad provides an unprecedented level of remote
control over your StudioLive. With SL Remote, you can adjust level,
pan, dynamics, bus routing, FX mixes, Aux mixes, and GEQ setting from
an Apple iPad via a wireless network. All you need is a computer with
Wi-Fi capabilities and an Apple iPad, and you’re ready to get started.
Please Note: This section describes the functionality of
SL Remote with all three StudioLive series mixers. All
Screen Shots are from the StudioLive 24.4.2.
Tutorials
Technical
Information
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
78
Hookup
An ad hoc, or “peer-to-peer,” network is a very simple network
involving at least two systems: in this case, the computer to which
your StudioLive is connected and an Apple iPad. Unlike the usual local
area network (LAN) that you use to connect multiple computers to
the Internet or to a shared file server, no server or router is needed.
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
To use StudioLive Remote, you must first install Universal Control on, and
sync your StudioLive to, a Windows or Apple computer that has both
a FireWire connection and a wireless card. Once you have connected
and synced your StudioLive to VSL on your computer, the next step is to
create an ad hoc wireless network between your iPad and your computer.
Overview
Networking your iPad and Computer
Creating an ad hoc wireless network between your computer and your
iPad is quick and easy. The network will allow you to remote-control VSL,
and hence your StudioLive, from an iPad, using StudioLive Remote.
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
STEP 1: Creating an Ad Hoc network on your computer
Controls
7.3.1
S oftware: Universal Control, SL Remote, Capture, and Studio One Artist7
Using StudioLive Remote for iPad 7.3
Windows XP
1. Open Start>Control Panel.
2. Click Network and Internet Connections.
3. Select Network Connections.
4. Right-click your wireless network connection and then click Properties.
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
5. Click the Wireless Networks tab in the Wireless
Network Connection Properties dialog box.
Connecting
to a
Computer
Owner’s Manual
6. Under Preferred Networks on the Wireless Networks tab, click Add.
7. On the Association tab, type the name of your ad hoc
wireless network in Network name (SSID) box. For example,
you could name your wireless network “StudioLive.”
8. Uncheck “The key is provided for me automatically.”
Tutorials
9. Check “This is a computer-to-computer (ad hoc) network.”
Technical
Information
10. Create a password and type it in both the Network Key and
Confirm Network Key boxes. For the best security, include
letters, numbers, and punctuation. Then click “OK.”
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
11. Click “OK” again to save your changes.
79
7
7.3
Software: Universal Control, SL Remote, Capture, and Studio One Artist PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
Using StudioLive Remote for iPad
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Windows Vista
1. Open Start>Connect to.
2. Click “Set up a connection or network.”
Overview
3. Select “Set up a wireless ad hoc network” and click Next.
4. Enter the new network name such as “StudioLive.”
Hookup
5. Enter a Security key or password. For the best security,
include letters, numbers, and punctuation.
6. Check “Save this Network.”
Controls
Windows 7
1. Open Start>Control Panel.
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
2. Click “Network and Internet.”
3. Click “Network and Sharing Center.”
4. Under “Change your networking settings,” click
“Set up a new connection or network.”
5. Select “Set up a wireless ad hoc (computer-to-computer) network.”
Connecting
to a
Computer
6. Click on “Next” twice.
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
8. Select the Security WAP (or WEP).
7. Enter the network name such as “StudioLive.”
9. Enter the Security key or password. For the best security,
include letters, numbers, and punctuation. Then click OK.
10. Check “Save this network.”
11. Click “Turn on Internet connection sharing.”
Mac OS X 10.5/10.6
Tutorials
1. On the Menu bar click on the Wireless Status Icon.
2. From the pull-down menu select “Create Network….”
Technical
Information
3. Give your Network a name, such as “StudioLive.”
4. If you would like set up a password (recommended),
check “Require Password.”
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
5. Create your password within the guidelines and click “OK.”
6. Once your network has been successfully created,
you will see it in your list of available networks.
80
Connect your iPad to your Ad Hoc Network
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
STEP 2: S oftware: Universal Control, SL Remote, Capture, and Studio One Artist7
Using StudioLive Remote for iPad 7.3
1. Tap on the Settings icon in your iPad.
Overview
2. Tap on “Network.”
3. Tap on “Wi-Fi.”
4. Under “Choose a Network,” you should now see your ad
hoc network in the list.
Hookup
Owner’s Manual
5. Tap on your newly created network to select it.
Controls
6. If you secured your network with a password,
you will prompted to enter it.
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
7. Tap on the menu arrow to the right of your
network name to open its network settings.
8. Turn Auto-Join to “On.”
9. You are now ready to launch StudioLive Remote and mix on the go!
Connecting
to a
Computer
Troubleshooting your Ad Hoc Network
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Every once in a while, your iPad will accept an ad hoc
network even though that network is not usable. When this
happens, you will see the Wi-Fi icon in the top status bar on
your iPad but you will not see your StudioLive in the Devices
list in SL Remote. Here’s what to do if this happens:
1. Tap on the Settings icon in your iPhone main menu.
2. Click on “Wi-Fi.”
3. Make sure a check mark is visible before your ad hoc network name.
Tutorials
4. Click on the arrow next to your ad hoc network name.
5. The IP address should begin with 169.254.xxx.xxx.
Technical
Information
6. If there is no IP (the field is blank), that’s why
StudioLive Remote can’t connect.
7. Wait about 60 seconds on that screen and a new IP (like
169.254.xxx.xxx) will be assigned automatically.
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
8. If no IP appears, click “choose Static,” then enter:
IP Address 169.254.1.2
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.255
81
7
7.3
Software: Universal Control, SL Remote, Capture, and Studio One Artist PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
Using StudioLive Remote for iPad
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
If address 169.254.1.2 is already in use by another device, replace
1 and 2 with numbers of your choice between 0 and 255.
Overview
If you are using StudioLive Remote in a venue with many wireless
networks, you can create a network on a different channel. Channel
11 is the default but it’s okay to use an alternative in order to ensure
that your iPad’s connection to your computer isn’t interrupted.
Hookup
POWER USER TIP: Network connections can occasionally require troubleshooting, especially
when a lot of wireless networks are in use. Because of this, it is always a good idea to get your iPad
and computer happily communicating before the pressure is on, and you have a singer trying to
dial in his monitor mix while you’re trying to mic up the drum kit. So while the guitarist is flirting
with the bartender, take a quick moment to get your iPad, computer, and StudioLive talking.
Controls
7.3.2
Connecting to Virtual StudioLive and the StudioLive Mixer
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Once you have created your ad hoc network and joined it from your
iPad, you are ready to launch StudioLive Remote. Important: You must
connect to your computer’s ad hoc network each time you plan on
remote-controlling your StudioLive with StudioLive Remote.
Apple’s iPad offer two unique viewing options: Landscape and Portrait:
Connecting
to a
Computer
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
For the most part, you will be holding your iPad in Landscape view. This will
allow you to use the Start, Overview, Aux Mix, and GEQ pages. Portrait view
provides you with a zoomed in view of the currently selected channel and allows
you to scroll quickly through every channel and bus on your StudioLive.
Tutorials
To launch StudioLive Remote, tap on the SL Remote icon on your iPad. When
you launch StudioLive Remote for the first time on a new ad hoc network,
or if you have joined a different wireless network since the last time you
linked up your computer and iPad, you will taken to the Start page.
Technical
Information
On the Start page, you will see a list of every StudioLive mixer on the network,
including the Offline 24.4.2 Simulation. The StudioLive 24.4.2 Offline Simulation
is there for you to practice your finger control away from your StudioLive.
To connect to your mixer, tap on the StudioLive device icon. The
text will change color to alert you that it has been selected.
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
Tap the Connect to Mixer button in the upper left hand corner to
open SL Remote and control your mixer from your iPad.
82
Owner’s Manual
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
SL Remote: Overview Page
••
Channel and Main Select
••
Channel Mute
••
Channel and Master Metering
••
Channel Panning
••
Channel FireWire Return
••
Channel and Main Gate, Compressor, and EQ overview
••
Channel and Main Gate, Compression, and EQ zoom
Hookup
Channel and Main Volume
Controls
••
Overview
The Overview page in StudioLive Remote corresponds directly with
most of the controls on the Overview Page in VSL. The following
parameters can be controlled and/or viewed from this page:
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
If you have labeled your channels using the Scribble Strip on the Overview
Tab in VSL, you will also be able to see your channel names.
Technical
Information
Tutorials
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Connecting
to a
Computer
POWER USER TIP: Because StudioLive Remote is a wireless controller for Virtual StudioLive, the
fastest way to get comfortable with StudioLive Remote is to get well acquainted with VSL.
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
7.3.2
S oftware: Universal Control, SL Remote, Capture, and Studio One Artist7
Using StudioLive Remote for iPad 7.3
83
7
7.3
Software: Universal Control, SL Remote, Capture, and Studio One Artist PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
Using StudioLive Remote for iPad
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Bus Assignments Query
Displays the bus assignments for a channel or bus.
Tap to open Bus Assignments Query Page and make changes.
Above each channel, you will find the Bus Assignments view. This displays
the current FireWire return and stereo linking for each channel.
Overview
Hookup
To change a particular channel’s FireWire return assignments, tap on the
display. This will open the Bus Assignments Query Page for that channel.
Pressing on the FireWire icon to activate the FireWire return. Any
selection made on this page is immediately displayed in its Bus
Assignment Query.
To close the page, press anywhere on the screen.
Controls
Fat Channel Microviews and
Fat Channel Zooms
Displays a Microview of the Gate, Compressor, and EQ.
Tap to open the zoomed view and make changes.
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Each Channel and Bus features a Microview of the Fat
Channel components. These Microviews allow you to see
whether a particular channel or bus has dynamics processing
enabled. If any of the dynamics processors in the Fat Channel
are turned off, its Microview will be grayed out.
To make changes to the Fat Channel dynamics processing, tap on
any of the Microviews. This will launch the Fat Channel zoomed view
with that component in focus; that is, if you tap on the EQ Microview,
the Fat Channel zoom will open with the EQ in focus. The zoomed
Fat Channel view corresponds directly to the Channel Tab in VSL.
Connecting
to a
Computer
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
You can switch between the dynamics components in the
zoomed Fat Channel view by swiping your finger to the left
or right. For example, if you launch the Gate Zoom and swipe
your finger to the left, the Fat Channel Zoom will focus on the
Compressor; swiping to the left again focuses the EQ.
Tutorials
To close the Fat Channel Zoom, tap on the “x” in the upper righthand corner. This will display the normal Overview page.
Technical
Information
Channel Controls: Select
Selects channel for Fat Channel Zoom and Portrait view.
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
When no Microview has been selected for Fat Channel Zoom, the channel
Select buttons merely display the channel number or name, if one has
been entered into the Scribble Strip in VSL. See Section 7.2.4.
Once Fat Channel Zoom is launched, the channel Select buttons
become active, and you can use them to select another channel
so that you can view its zoomed Fat Channel settings.
84
Owner’s Manual
To pan a channel, tap and hold anywhere on the Pan control and then
slide your finger right or left while maintaining constant contact with the
iPad screen. These controls correspond directly to those in VSL and on the
StudioLive.
POWER USER TIP: The Pan control supports off-axis movement. Once you
have pressed a pan field to select it, you can slide your finger anywhere in the
screen and make a side-to-side movement to control the pan position.
Controls the mute for each channel.
Channel Controls:
Fader and Metering
Controls
To Mute a channel, tap its Mute button. The Mute button will turn red,
indicating that the channel has been muted.
Controls the level for each channel and displays each channel’s metering.
To control the volume of a channel, tap the fader and move your finger up
or down, while maintaining constant contact with the iPad screen.
POWER USER TIP: The fader supports off-axis movement. Once you
have touched a fader to select it, you can slide your finger anywhere in
the screen and make a up/down movement to control the fader.
Connecting
to a
Computer
The fader position is displayed in the Channel Select field.
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Channel Controls: Mute Controls:
Mute
Hookup
The pan position is displayed in the Channel Select field.
Overview
Controls the panning for each channel.
As with VSL, the fader position set in StudioLive Remote is the level
that you will hear. To sync the physical faders on your StudioLive
with StudioLive Remote, press the Locate button on your mixer.
While in Locate mode, the physical faders on your StudioLive will not
be active, so you can adjust them without any changes in level.
Displays the metering for the Main bus, Auxes (16.0.2) and Subgroups (16.4.2 and
24.4.2).
Tap to open the Masters Section page.
In the upper right-hand corner of every page in StudioLive Remote
(Overview, Aux Mixer, and Graphic EQ), you will find the Masters
Overview. This displays the metering for the Main bus.
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
Masters Overview
Masters Section Page
Technical
Information
Tutorials
To the left of the fader, the user will see the meter for the channel. The
meter will follow the meter mode selected on the StudioLive or from VSL.
Meter mode cannot be changed from SL Remote.
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Channel Controls: Pan
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
S oftware: Universal Control, SL Remote, Capture, and Studio One Artist7
Using StudioLive Remote for iPad 7.3
Tapping on the Masters Overview will
open the Masters Section Page.
85
7
7.3
Software: Universal Control, SL Remote, Capture, and Studio One Artist PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
Using StudioLive Remote for iPad
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
The Masters Section page displays the fader,
meter, and Fat Channel Microviews for the Mains,
Subgroups (16.4.2 and 24.4.2) and Auxes (16.0.2).
These parameters are controlled the same way they
are controlled for channels in the Overview page.
Overview
Tapping on any of the Fat Channel Microviews
will close the Masters Section Page. The Fat
Channel Zoom will open with the selected
parameter in focus for the selected bus.
Hookup
To close the Masters Section page, simply tap
anywhere outside it.
Controls
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
7.3.3
Aux Mix Page
Connecting
to a
Computer
The Aux Mix page shows the send level for each channel on each Aux
and FX bus. It corresponds directly to the Aux Mix tab in VSL but has
been streamlined to show only the parameters you need to control when
away from the StudioLive. To navigate right or left, touch anywhere on
the screen and swipe your finger to the left or right. Swiping left scrolls
the screen to the left. Swiping right scrolls the screen to the right.
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Tutorials
Technical
Information
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
86
Owner’s Manual
S oftware: Universal Control, SL Remote, Capture, and Studio One Artist7
Using StudioLive Remote for iPad 7.3
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
•• Channel Send
•• Pre / Post position
•• Aux and FX Bus Gate, Compressor, and EQ overview
Overview
•• Aux and FX Bus Gate, Compression, and EQ zoom
•• Edit Effects
•• Recall Effects
Displays Channel Send levels to that Aux bus.
To create an Aux Mix using StudioLive Remote, tap anywhere in the Aux
Mix Select tab for that Aux. The selected Aux Mix tab will be highlighted
to alert you that its individual channel send levels will be displayed below.
Controls
Aux Mix Select and Aux Mixing
Hookup
•• Assign/Unassign Effects
Press the Post button to engage post-fader sends.
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
The Gate, Compressor, and EQ Microviews function the
same for Auxes as they do for channels and Mains.
To adjust the send levels for any channel, tap anywhere in its
send level and move your finger up or down while maintaining
constant contact with the iPad screen. These send-level displays
have been designed to emulate the StudioLive Fat Channel meters
while in Aux Mix mode, so they should look very familiar!
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
Technical
Information
Tutorials
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Connecting
to a
Computer
POWER USER TIP: The Aux sends support off-axis movement. Once you
have touched an aux send control to select it, you can slide your finger anywhere in
the screen and make an up/down movement to control the aux send level.
87
7
7.3
Software: Universal Control, SL Remote, Capture, and Studio One Artist PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
Using StudioLive Remote for iPad
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
FX Mix Select and FX Bus Mixing
Displays Channel Send Levels to that FX Bus
To create an FX Mix using SL Remote, tap anywhere in the FX Mix Select
tab for that Aux. The selected FX Mix tab will be highlighted to alert you
that its individual channel send levels will be displayed below.
Overview
Press the Post button to engage post-fader sends.
Press the Mute button to mute the effect to its assigned buses.
Hookup
The Gate, Compressor, and EQ Microviews function the
same for auxes as they do for channels and mains.
Controls
To adjust the send levels for any channel, tap anywhere in its
send level and move your finger up or down while maintaining
constant contact with the iPad screen. These send level displays
have been designed to emulate the StudioLive Fat Channel Meters
while in Aux Mix mode, so they should look very familiar!
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
POWER USER TIP: The Aux Sends support off-axis movement. Once you have
touched an FX send control to select it, you can slide your finger anywhere in
the screen and make an up/down movement to control the FX Send.
FX Edit Button
Opens FX Editor
From SL Remote, you can load new FX Types and adjust their parameters.
To edit an effect, tap on the Edit button in the FX Select Tab for FXA or
FXB. This will launch the FX Editor.
Connecting
to a
Computer
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
To load a new effect type, tap on the effects type window,
and then tap on the new effect type to load it. To adjust a
parameter, simply tap on it and move your finger up or down
while maintaining constant contact with your iPad.
To close the Effects Editor, tap the “x” in the upper right corner.
Tutorials
Technical
Information
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
88
Owner’s Manual
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
The GEQ Page
Connecting
to a
Computer
As with StudioLive and VSL, StudioLive Remote includes a Graphic EQ
page so that you can tune the room from any listening position or dial in
a monitor on stage while you are actually standing in front of it. The GEQ
page in StudioLive Remote corresponds directly to the GEQ tab in VSL.
From the GEQ page you can control and view the following parameters:
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Controls
Hookup
Overview
7.3.4
S oftware: Universal Control, SL Remote, Capture, and Studio One Artist7
Using StudioLive Remote for iPad 7.3
•• All 31 bands of each graphic EQ (1 Main Stereo for StudioLive
16.0.2, 8 dual-mono for StudioLive 16.4.2 and 24.4.2
•• GEQ insert assignments (StudioLive 24.4.2 only)
•• Draw the EQ curve you want rather than adjust each slider manually
Brings a pair of graphic EQs into view (StudioLive 16.4.2 and 24.4.2 only).
To begin making changes to a particular GEQ, you must first select it. To
do this, simply tap on the GEQ pair you’d like to edit.
GEQ On/Off Button
Turns a graphic EQ on or off.
Technical
Information
By default, each graphic EQ is turned off. To enable a graphic EQ, tap the
GEQ On button in StudioLive Remote and VSL, or use the GEQ menu on
your StudioLive.
POWER USER TIP: If you are making adjustments to a graphic EQ,
and you can’t hear your changes, make sure it is on!
GEQ Flatten Button
Sets all graphic EQ band levels to 0 dB.
To reset a GEQ to 0 dB, simply tap its Flatten button. This will return each
slider to 0 dB so that no frequency band is boosted or attenuated.
89
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
GEQ Select Tab
Tutorials
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
•• Zoom in for fine adjustments
7
7.3
Software: Universal Control, SL Remote, Capture, and Studio One Artist PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
Using StudioLive Remote for iPad
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Zooming In
Zooms view in to make fine adjustments.
Press the “+” button to zoom in on the GEQ View. Slide your finger to the
left or right to access additional bands.
Overview
Use the Overview Map in the bottom right corner of the GEQ
page to reference your current position within the 31-bands.
Zooming Out
Zooms view out to make fine adjustments.
Hookup
Press the “-” button to zoom out the GEQ View. If you have not zoomed all
the way out (so that you don’t have all 31 bands on your screen), you can
slide your finger to the left or right to access additional bands.
Use the Overview Map in the bottom right corner of the GEQ
page to reference your current position within the 31 bands.
Controls
Overview Map
Provides a reference point for the current bands in view.
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
All this zooming in and out provides the ultimate control when making
GEQ adjustments but makes it easy to get lost and forget which bands in
the GEQ you’re adjusting. This is where the Overview Map comes in.
The Overview Map is located in the bottom right corner of the
GEQ page. Whether you’ve zoomed in on a few bands or zoomed
all the way out so that you can see all 31 bands on your iPad,
the Overview Map will highlight which bands are currently in
view and where they are in reference to the rest of the GEQ.
Connecting
to a
Computer
POWER USER TIP: The Overview Map always follows your current position. So if you
scroll left or right while you are zoomed in, the Overview Map will scroll with you.
Draw Tool
Allows you to draw the EQ curve with your finger.
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
SL Remote provides flexible control over your graphic EQ settings. You
can control each band individually or several bands at once via the sliders
or you can simply draw in your own EQ curve and fine tune from there.
To enable EQ Curve Drawing, tap the Draw button and slide your
finger over the graphic EQ bands to begin drawing your curve.
Each band’s slider will snap to your finger as you pass over it.
GEQ Assignment
Inserts each GEQ on an Aux, Subgroup, or Main bus output pair. (StudioLive 24.4.2
only)
Tutorials
Just like VSL and the StudioLive 24.4.2, SL Remote allows you to choose
onto which output pair you’d like to insert each graphic EQ. To change an
assignment, simply tap on the Assign menu, and then choose the output
pair by tapping it.
Technical
Information
StudioLive 16.4.2 users: each of your graphic EQs is
already assigned to either your Main output or one of
your Auxes. These assignments cannot be changed.
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
StudioLive 16.0.2 users have a graphic EQ available for the Main bus only.
90
Owner’s Manual
Channel Zoom Page
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
7.3.5
S oftware: Universal Control, SL Remote, Capture, and Studio One Artist7
Using StudioLive Remote for iPad 7.3
Next:
Advances View to
Next Channel
Hookup
Sub / Main Bus Assigns:
Assigns Channel / Bus
to Subs or Mains
Gate:
Controls
Gate
Functions
Compressor:
Controls
Compressor
Functions
Connecting
to a
Computer
Channel
Scroll Bar
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Controls
FW In:
Engages
FireWire Return
Overview
The Channel Zoom page opens automatically when you turn your
iPad to the Portrait view. This page provides you with a look at
every controllable parameter for a channel or bus. It also allows
you to quickly scroll through every channel and bus on your mixer
by sliding your finger down the right side of your screen.
Pan:
Controls /
Displays
Panning
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
EQ:
Controls
EQ Functions
HPF:
Control
High-Pass
Filter
Frequency
Fader:
Controls
Output
Level
Phase:
Inverts
Channel
Phase
Aux / FX Send Controls:
Sets Channel Send Levels to Each
Aux and FX Bus
Technical
Information
Mute:
Mutes
Channel
Post:
Engages
Dig Out
(Channel)
Post Fader
(Aux / FX)
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
Metering:
Displays
Metering
(Meter Mode
Set in VSL
or on Mixer)
Tutorials
Limiter:
Controls
Limiter
Functions
91
7
7.3
Software: Universal Control, SL Remote, Capture, and Studio One Artist PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
Using StudioLive Remote for iPad
Capture
Overview
PreSonus Capture™ is an audio-recording application created exclusively
for use with PreSonus StudioLive-series mixers. To record from the
StudioLive mixer into Capture, you will need to install the StudioLive
driver and connect the mixer to a FireWire port on your computer. Once
the StudioLive mixer has been connected to your computer, and Capture
has been installed, simply launch Capture, and you are ready to record.
Hookup
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
7.4
This section contains general information, including
the basic layout and workflow of Capture, and is a great
place to start for new audio-software users.
Controls
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Connecting
to a
Computer
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
7.4.1
What is Capture?
Versions
Tutorials
There is one version of Capture, which runs under the
Windows® and Mac® OS X operating systems. This manual
explains both the Windows and the Mac versions.
Tips
Technical
Information
Several shortcuts and alternative methods or functions
are mentioned in this section. These tips are intended to
improve your workflow and will be shown as follows:
Really Helpful Information
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
If you float the mouse over most tools, buttons, or windows
in Capture for a few seconds, a Tooltip will appear that names
the function that the tool, button, or window serves.
92
Key commands with modifier keys are shown with the Windows modifier
key first, as follows: [Win modifier key]/[Mac modifier key]+[key].
For example, [Ctrl]/[Cmd]+[C] means “press [Ctrl]+C
in Windows, or press [Cmd]+C in Mac OS X.”
Where there is no difference between the Windows and Mac version of a
key command, only one key command will be displayed; for example: [F3].
Controls
Menu Functions
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Many functions can be reached via hierarchical menus.
Where menu navigation is referenced, it will appear
as follows: Menu/Menu Entry/…/Function.
Nondestructive Editing and Undo/Redo
Almost every user action in Capture can be undone and
redone. There is no limit to how far back actions can be undone
and how far forward undone actions can be redone.
Because of this, feel free to explore without worrying that
you will permanently alter anything. In fact, just pressing
buttons might be the quickest way to learn.
Connecting
to a
Computer
High Quality Audio
Like StudioLive, Capture features a 32-bit floating-point audio
engine. An audio engine is the “number cruncher” that does the math
required to record and play back digital audio. Capture records with
state-of-the-art accuracy; all you have to do is make great music!
Start Page
When Capture is launched, by default you will be taken to the Start page.
Create and Open Session
Tutorials
At the upper left of the Start Page are two buttons: Create
Session and Open Session. A Session is a document in which
you record and edit audio and MIDI. Click on the Create Session
button to create a new Session or click on the Open Session
button to browse for and open an existing Session.
Technical
Information
Recent Files
To the right of the Start Page menu section, the Recent Files
list includes links to the most recently opened documents.
Click on any of these links to quickly open the Session.
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
7.4.2
Overview
Many operations in Capture have associated key commands (keyboard
shortcuts) that can be used instead of navigating menus with the mouse.
Several of these key commands use modifier keys, some of which
differ depending on the operating system (Windows or Mac OS X).
Hookup
Key Commands
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
S oftware: Universal Control, SL Remote, Capture, and Studio One Artist7
Capture7.4
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Owner’s Manual
Audio Device and Sample Rate
Capture was specifically created for use with PreSonus StudioLiveseries mixers. It is not possible to configure any other audio device
93
7
Software: Universal Control, SL Remote, Capture, and Studio One Artist PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
7.4Capture
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
for use with Capture. The Audio Device window will either display
“PreSonus FireStudio” or “No Audio Device”; the former indicates that
your StudioLive mixer is connected to the computer correctly and
is ready to use with Capture. The Sample Rate window displays the
currently configured sample rate, as set on the StudioLive mixer.
Overview
About Capture
To view information about Capture, including your version number and
acknowledgements, choose About Capture from the Help file menu.
Hookup
7.3.3
The Session Page
Controls
Capture features a single-window user interface so you don’t
need to manage multiple windows and views. When a new
Session is created or an existing Session is opened, you will
be taken to the Session page. This page contains all of the
necessary tools to record and edit multitrack audio.
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
The following are diagrams and descriptions of the Session interface.
Transport
The Transport is at the top of the Session page and contains:
Connecting
to a
Computer
Meter Bridge: Peak LED-style meters with clip indicators for each input
into Capture from the StudioLive mixer, plus an additional pair of meters
for the routable Master track. (See Section 7.2.5 for details on how to
route a bus to this track.)
Link Button: Between each meter you will find a Link button When this
button is active, Capture will record that track as a stereo-interleaved file.
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
ecord Arm Button: Below each meter, you will find the
R
Record Arm button for that track. When this button is
active, Capture will record audio from that input.
Tutorials
Technical
Information
Mouse Tools
•• Arrow Tool: The default tool for access to most functions.
•• Range Tool: Select the range of an Audio Event for editing.
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
•• Splice Tool: Splice Audio Events.
•• Eraser Tool: Erase Audio Events.
94
•• Sample Rate Display: Displays the current
Capture/StudioLive Sample Rate.
Owner’s Manual
S oftware: Universal Control, SL Remote, Capture, and Studio One Artist7
Capture7.4
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Transport Controls
•• Previous Marker: Jump the playback cursor to the previous marker.
•• Rewind: Rewind for the duration this button is held down.
Overview
•• Fast Forward: Fast Forward for the duration this button is held down.
•• Next Marker: Jump the playback cursor to the next marker.
•• Back to Beginning: Return to the beginning of the Session.
Hookup
•• Stop: Stop playback.
•• Play: Start playback at the current playback-cursor position.
•• Record: Start recording at the current playback-cursor position.
Controls
•• Loop: Engage/Disengage Loop mode.
•• Time Display: Displays the time at the current playback-cursor position.
The Edit Window
Tutorials
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Connecting
to a
Computer
The Edit window is the main view of the Session page,
which provides an overview of the Session for editing.
Technical
Information
The Edit Window contains the following:
Timeline Ruler: Displays time increments in seconds.
Marker Lane: Displays user-inserted markers.
Arm All: Click this button to arm all inputs for recording.
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
7.4.4
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
•• Remaining Time: Displays the remaining time that can
be recorded, based on the size of the available storage
left on the hard drive to which you are recording.
Marker ±: Click on the plus (+) button to add a marker at
the current playback cursor position. Select a marker and
click on the minus (-) button to remove the marker.
95
7
Software: Universal Control, SL Remote, Capture, and Studio One Artist PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Track Column: Contains a dedicated audio track for each
audio input into Capture from the StudioLive mixer.
Vertical Zoom: Increases or decreases the
height of the tracks and audio files.
Overview
Horizontal Zoom: Zooms the timeline in or out.
7.4.5
Getting Started in Capture
Hookup
Tracking is the first stage of audio production. The following
chapter discusses aspects of recording tracks in Capture, including
Session creation and setup, Audio Tracks and Events, and more.
Controls
Audio Device
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Before recording anything in Capture, please take a
moment to be sure your StudioLive mixer is properly
connected to the computer via FireWire and that
Capture displays the StudioLive as your audio device
on the Start page.
When the StudioLive mixer is not connected to the
computer successfully, Capture will display “No Audio
Device” in the Audio Device field.
Connecting
to a
Computer
Creating a New Session
A Session is the document type in which all recording
takes place in Capture. To create a new Session, do
one of the following:
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
1. From the Start page, click on the New Session button.
2. Navigate to File/New Session.
3. Press [Ctrl]/[Cmd]+N on the keyboard.
Tutorials
Session Setup
When a new Session is created, a setup menu
with the following options will pop up:
Technical
Information
Session Title
This will be the title of your Session. This name will be the
Session file name (Title.Session), as well as the name of the
new folder that contains all data related to your Session.
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
Session Location
This is where new Sessions and all related data will be saved. The Session
location can be chosen each time you create a Session. By default, the
96
S oftware: Universal Control, SL Remote, Capture, and Studio One Artist7
Capture7.4
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
new Session location will be the Capture folder in your Documents
folder. You can choose a different file location by clicking on the Browse
button and browsing to a new location. The last known save location
will appear as the default the next time you create a new Session.
Overview
Capture Audio I/O Setup
Hookup
There is no need to set up audio inputs and outputs in Capture,
as it automatically detects which type of StudioLive mixer
(16.0.2, 16.4.2, or 24.4.2) is connected and self-configures. Each
input from your StudioLive mixer is represented with a mono
input track in the Track column of the Session, and each input
track has a corresponding level meter in the meter bridge.
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Connecting
to a
Computer
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Controls
The following diagram illustrates the one-to-one relationship
of the StudioLive and Capture input channels. The input signal
into each channel on the StudioLive mixer is automatically
routed to each respective input channel in Capture.
Technical
Information
Tutorials
It is possible to process each StudioLive mixer input channel with
the Fat Channel before the input signal is routed to Capture. To
do this, you will need to engage the Post button in the Dig Out
section of the Fat Channel for each channel in your StudioLive mixer.
This routes the signal post-EQ and post-dynamics processing.
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
Owner’s Manual
97
7
Software: Universal Control, SL Remote, Capture, and Studio One Artist PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
7.4Capture
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
7.4.6
Recording in Capture
Record-Enabling an Audio Track
Overview
To record to an audio track, the track must be record-enabled,
or armed. Capture provides two Record Enable buttons for
each input: one on the track and on the meter bridge.
Hookup
To record-enable an audio track, click on either the Record Enable
button on the track or on the meter bridge. Both buttons will turn
entirely red in color when either button is enabled, and the track’s
corresponding meter in the meter bridge should begin to move up and
down if there is live audio on that channel in the StudioLive mixer.
Controls
lick on the Arm All button at the top of the Track
C
column to record-enable every track at once.
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Once an audio track is record-enabled, you are ready
to record audio to that track. Refer to the “Activating
Recording” section for more on this topic.
Monitoring Live Audio Input
You monitor live audio input on the StudioLive mixer; there
is no separate monitoring capability in Capture.
Setting Input Levels
Connecting
to a
Computer
Setting the proper input levels is critical to making a good live mix and
recording. The basic idea is to set the input gain on your StudioLive mixer
as high as possible without overloading the input. Overloading the input
will cause clipping (digital distortion), which is particularly unpleasant and
will ruin the recording. This damage cannot be undone in software. There
is a clip indicator for each input on the StudioLive mixer for this purpose.
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
If an input channel is not clipping on your StudioLive
mixer, you can be sure that there it will not clip in Capture.
Refer to Section 8.7 for a level-setting tutorial.
Activating Recording in Capture
Tutorials
Once you have the desired tracks record-enabled, the next step is to
record. To activate recording, click on the Record button in the Transport.
The Record button will turn red, and the Play button will turn green in the
Transport; the Playback Cursor will start to scroll from left to right from its
current position; and a new Audio Event will be recorded to any recordenabled tracks.
Technical
Information
Recording will continue until you manually stop it by clicking on the
Stop button in the Transport, or press [Spacebar] on the keyboard.
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
Capture utilizes the Broadcast Wave file format for recording. This
is the only format supported, as it is the most widely used, and it
98
Owner’s Manual
S oftware: Universal Control, SL Remote, Capture, and Studio One Artist7
Capture7.4
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
contains timestamps that mark when recordings start within a Song.
When recorded Broadcast Wave audio files get bigger than 4 GB, the
RF64 file format is automatically used as the standard file format.
7.4.7
Overview
T he recommended file system for the recording partition on
your computer is NTFS on Windows and HFS+ on Mac OS X.
Editing in Capture
Controls
Hookup
After recording, the next step in production is usually editing. In the
editing process, recorded events are manipulated in many ways to
achieve a desired sound. All audio that exists within the timeline
of your Session will be visually represented by Audio Events, which
contain waveform representations of the recorded audio. Audio
Events can be moved and split, among other possibilities.
Mouse Tools allow direct interaction with Audio Events using the mouse.
It is helpful to remember that actions done using the Mouse Tools can be
undone at any time, so you can feel free to explore their functions
without permanently altering anything. The following Mouse Tools and
related functions are available.
Arrow Tool
Move an Audio Event
To move an event using the Arrow Tool, click anywhere on the event and
drag left, right, up, or down. Dragging the event left or right will move
the event backward and forward in time, relative to the Timeline zoom.
Dragging the event up or down will move the
Audio Event to the adjacent audio track.
Size an Audio Event
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
Technical
Information
Tutorials
Events can be thought of as windows into audio files, where what
you see is what you will hear. Sizing is a fundamental technique:
Audio Events are made shorter or longer, so that only a portion
of the audio they contain is seen, and therefore heard.
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Connecting
to a
Computer
This is the default selected tool. Click on the Arrow Tool button or press
[NumPad 1] on the keyboard to select the Arrow Tool. The following
describes various possible functions using the Arrow Tool.
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Mouse Tools
99
7
Software: Universal Control, SL Remote, Capture, and Studio One Artist PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
7.4Capture
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
To size any Audio Event using the Arrow Tool, float the mouse to the
left or right edge of the event to reveal the Sizing Tool. When this tool
appears, click and drag left or right to size the event. Audio Events
can be sized and resized nondestructively any number of times.
Overview
Hookup
The pictures above illustrate an Audio Event before and after it is sized.
Select Multiple Audio Events
Controls
Multiple Audio Events can be selected at once in order to edit
them all at once with a single action. To select multiple Audio
Events with the Arrow Tool, do one of the following:
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
•• C
lick outside of the range of an Audio Event, and then drag
over any other events; a gray box will be drawn while you drag
over the targeted selection area. Release the click once the box
is drawn over all of the events you wish to select, and these
events will now all be selected and can be edited at once.
Connecting
to a
Computer
•• C
lick on any event, and then while holding [Ctrl]/[Cmd] on the
keyboard click on any other event(s) to select them. This allows
you to select multiple events that are not close in proximity to
each other. All selected events can now be edited at once.
Range Tool
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
The Range Tool is used to select a range, or area, within Audio Events.
Click on the Range Tool button or press [NumPad 3] on the keyboard to
select the Range Tool.
To select a range within events, using the Range Tool, click-and-drag
over the area to be selected; a gray box will be drawn over the targeted
selection area. Release the click once you’ve drawn the box over
the range of the events you wish to select. The range of the events
you have selected is now treated as a single, consolidated event.
Tutorials
•• A common use of the Range Tool is to quickly select and delete
a range of audio within events, rather than using the Split Tool
to make two splits, then selecting and deleting the section with
the Arrow Tool. This process is shown in the pictures below.
Technical
Information
•• Once a range has been selected, the Range Tool will
automatically become the Arrow Tool when the mouse
cursor is floated over the selected range. This makes quickly
selecting and editing any range of an event very simple.
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
•• The Range Tool can be temporarily toggled when the Arrow Tool
is selected by pressing and holding [Ctrl]\[Cmd] on the keyboard.
100
Splice Tool
Overview
Using the Splice Tool, single Audio Events can be split into multiple Audio
Events. Click on the Split Tool button, or press [NumPad 4] on the
keyboard to select the Split Tool.
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
S oftware: Universal Control, SL Remote, Capture, and Studio One Artist7
Capture7.4
Click on any Audio Event with the Split Tool to split the event at that
position.
Eraser Tool
•• To delete any event using the Eraser Tool, simply click on the
event. The Eraser Tool is unaffected by the current selection
and will only affect the event that is directly clicked on.
Common Editing Actions
As with most other software applications, Capture supports basic
Cut, Copy, and Paste actions. Once a selection of events, or a range of
events, has been made, these actions can be performed as follows:
•• Cut: Press [Ctrl]/[Cmd]+X on the keyboard to cut the current selection.
•• Copy: Press [Ctrl]/[Cmd]+C on the keyboard to copy the current selection.
•• P
aste: Once a selection is cut or copied, press [Ctrl]/[Cmd]+V on the
keyboard to paste the selection. The selection will be pasted to the current
Playback Cursor position, or to the beginning of the track from which the
selection originated if the Playback Cursor is not currently set anywhere.
Power User Tip: Listen While Editing
In audio production, the editing process can be particularly unforgiving. Small inaccuracies when
splitting, moving, or performing other actions on recorded audio can lead to unwanted results.
Tutorials
As simple as it may seem, the act of listening while editing is often overlooked. For
instance, when sizing the edges of a vocal part to remove unwanted sounds between
words, it is tempting to make the edits based on the visual representation of the
waveform. While this may work sometimes, it is a much better idea to listen as you
size the events to be sure you are not removing any critical part of the vocals.
Connecting
to a
Computer
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
The Eraser Tool is used to delete an Audio Event. Click on the Eraser Tool
button or press [NumPad 5] on the keyboard to select the Eraser Tool.
Controls
Hookup
Notice that the split will occur at the leftmost edge of the
Split Tool icon (the scissors). By splitting a single event, you
essentially create two events that can be edited independently.
If multiple events are selected across multiple tracks, the Split
Tool will affect all of the selected events in the same way.
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Owner’s Manual
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
Technical
Information
Listening to your edits as you make them will save time and frustration in nearly every case.
101
7
Software: Universal Control, SL Remote, Capture, and Studio One Artist PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
7.4Capture
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
7.4.8
Capture Session Navigation
The ability to quickly navigate to certain areas of your Session is
highly useful during the mixing process. The following describes the
ways in which you can quickly navigate throughout your Session.
Overview
Scrolling
To scroll left and right through time in your Session, click-and-drag
the horizontal scroll bar near the bottom of the Edit window.
Hookup
Timeline Zooming
You can zoom in and out of your Session so that you can
look at the entire length or just view a small region of time to
make precise edits. To zoom, do one of the following:
Controls
lick-and-drag left or right on the Zoom scroll bar in the lower
C
right-hand corner of the Edit window to zoom in or out.
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
ress [W] on the keyboard to zoom out slightly. Press [E] on the
P
keyboard to zoom in slightly. Click inside the Timeline ruler at
any point in time and drag down or up to zoom in or out.
Using Markers
In Capture, the Marker Lane is used to place markers at desired
places in the Timeline, after which navigation to the markers is
easy. Markers are also helpful when exporting your Session to
individual mixes or to work in another recording application.
Connecting
to a
Computer
The Marker Lane is always visible, just below the Timeline.
Inserting Markers
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
To insert a new Marker into the Marker Lane, with playback running or
stopped, click on the Add Marker button, or press [Insert] on the
keyboard. Each new marker will be numbered sequentially by default (#1,
#2, #3…). To rename a marker, double-click on the marker in the Marker
Lane, type in a new name, and then press [Enter] on the keyboard.
Navigating Markers
Tutorials
It is possible to quickly jump the Playback Cursor between markers in the
Marker Lane. Click on the Previous Marker button in the Transport, or
press [B] on the keyboard, to jump to the previous marker. Click on the
Next Marker button in the Transport, or press [N] on the keyboard, to
jump to the next marker. Jumping to markers during playback allows
quick comparisons between different sections of your Session.
Technical
Information
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
102
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
S oftware: Universal Control, SL Remote, Capture, and Studio One Artist7
Capture7.4
Looping
••
Mouse over the gray line above the time line.
You will notice that your curser changes to a
pencil tool and you can draw your loop range.
Hookup
S elect an Event with the Arrow Tool, or select
a Range with the Range Tool, that you wish
to loop. Press [P] on the keyboard to set the
loop range to your selection. The range will
be indicated by a bar drawn in the timeline,
with a left and right flag on either end.
Controls
••
Overview
To Loop the playback of any range of a Capture
session, do one of the following:
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Once your loop range is set, you can click on the
Loop button in the Transport, or press [L] or [/]
on the keyboard to engage Loop mode. Start
playback before the end of the Loop range, and
when the end of the range is reached, playback
will jump back to the beginning of the Loop range
automatically for as long as Loop is engaged.
Engaging Record in the Transport will disable Loop mode
and begin recording at the current playback cursor position.
It is not possible to engage Loop while recording.
Mixing in Capture
Connecting
to a
Computer
7.4.9
Mixing is the part of the production process where all
recorded tracks are combined to mono or stereo. The goal
is to balance relative volume, frequency, and dynamic
content in order to achieve a desired cohesive sound.
Mixing with Capture and StudioLive
Tutorials
No mixing is done in Capture directly. Instead, the individual outputs
of each audio track in Capture are hardwired to the FireWire returns for
each corresponding input channel on the StudioLive mixer. Thus, with
the FireWire returns engaged for each input channel on your StudioLive
mixer, the output of your multitrack Capture Session is routed to the
StudioLive mixer, where it can be mixed just like any other audio input.
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Owner’s Manual
Creating a Mix
Technical
Information
The process of creating a mix with Capture and the StudioLive
mixer is quite simple. You play back your recorded tracks through
the StudioLive and record the main output of the StudioLive
using the Flexible Input (Track 15 and 16 in Capture).
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
Please Note: Just like you cannot record both the Main Mix and Analog Inputs 15 and
16, you cannot playback audio from Tracks 15 and 16 in Capture and record the Main
Mix at the same time. Because of this, if you plan on doing a mixdown in Capture, it
is recommended that you do not record any material from Inputs 15 and 16.
103
7
Software: Universal Control, SL Remote, Capture, and Studio One Artist PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
7.4Capture
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
The process works as follows:
1. In VSL, select “Main L/R” for Flexible Inputs 15 and 16.
Overview
2. Be sure Record Arm is disabled for all input Audio
Tracks in Capture, and the FireWire returns for all input
channels on the StudioLive mixer are engaged.
Hookup
3. In Capture, click the stereo link button on Track
15 and 16 and enable Record Arm.
4. Bring the playback cursor position to the beginning of the Session
by clicking the Back to Beginning button in the Transport.
Controls
5. Activate recording by clicking on the Record button in the Transport;
the playback cursor should begin to move from left to right, and
audio should be playing through each input on the StudioLive mixer.
The Auxiliary Stereo Track in Capture should be recording a new
Audio Event, which is the main mix from the StudioLive mixer.
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
The new Audio Event that has been recorded from the
StudioLive mixer will be stored as a stereo WAV file at the
sample rate to which the StudioLive mixer is set.
Importing Audio Files
Connecting
to a
Computer
It is possible to import WAV and AIFF audio files into
your Session. To import an audio file, select Import
Audio File from the Session menu to open the Import
File menu. Browse to the desired file and click on it to
select it. Then click on Open to import the file into
your Session.
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
An Audio Event for the imported file will be created
and placed on the currently selected track in your
Session, at the current Playback Cursor position.
Preview Player
Tutorials
Using the Preview Player, you can audition audio files
as you are browsing in the Import File menu. Click the
Play button in the Preview Player to play the currently
selected audio file. Click the Stop button to stop
playback. Click the Loop button to loop the playback
of the currently selected audio file.
Technical
Information
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
104
To export audio from your Capture Session, navigate
to Session/Export to Audio File, or press [Ctrl]/[Cmd]+E
on the keyboard to open the Export to Audio File
menu.
Location
Controls
Hookup
The top section of the Export to Audio File
menu is where you will select a location and
name for the audio file. Click on the Location
button to choose a file location. Double-click
on the filename, type in a new name, and then
press Enter to choose a name for the file.
Overview
Export Audio Files
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
S oftware: Universal Control, SL Remote, Capture, and Studio One Artist7
Capture7.4
Format
If you wish to put your audio on a standard audio
CD, the format should be a Wave file with 16bit resolution and a 44.1 kHz sample rate.
Options
The bottom section of the Export to Audio File menu has
several options that will affect how files are created.
Choose from Export Session, Each Marker, or Between Selected Markers.
•• The Export Session option will export the entire range
of your Session, which will be to the furthest point in
time that any Audio Event on a track extends.
•• The Export Each Marker option will export separate files for
each range between the markers in the Marker Lane.
•• The Export Between Selected Markers option will export audio files
between the range of any two selected markers in the Marker Lane.
Connecting
to a
Computer
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Select the format of the mixdown audio file in
the middle section of the Export to Audio File
menu. Choose from Wave (WAV) or AIFF and then
choose the desired Resolution and Sample Rate.
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Owner’s Manual
Mixing a Capture Session in Studio One
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
Technical
Information
Tutorials
Many users will want to use Capture strictly as a track-recording tool
and mix the recorded tracks later in a DAW application. PreSonus
has included a copy of Studio One Artist with your StudioLive for
just this purpose. Both Studio One Artist and Studio One Pro can
open Capture Session files. All markers, edits, track names, etc., are
preserved; no further effort is required. Simply launch Studio One
and open your Capture session. (See Section 7.4 for more details.)
105
7
Software: Universal Control, SL Remote, Capture, and Studio One Artist PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
7.4Capture
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Mixing a Capture Session in a Different Recording Application
For users who wish to mix their Capture Session in a DAW other
than Studio One, there are several ways in which to import
your Capture session, as described in the following.
Overview
Save a Capture Session as Open TL
Hookup
Many audio-recording programs provide support for opening a
document type called Open TL (Open Track List). An Open TL file
provides a reference for all of the audio tracks and Audio Events,
with their corresponding positions, in your Capture Session, so that
another audio program can reconstruct your Session automatically.
This makes it possible for you to open your Capture Session and
work as you normally do in your favorite recording application.
Controls
To save an Open TL version of your Session, select Save Session
As in the File menu of Capture. Name the file as usual, and
choose Open TL (*.tl) in the Save As Type selection box.
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Click on Save to save your Session as an Open TL document
and confirm the command by clicking Yes in the confirmation
window. This file will be placed by default in your Session
folder and will not overwrite the original Capture Session file.
Note that the Open TL format will not save your markers.
Import Capture Session Audio Files Directly
Connecting
to a
Computer
Some audio-editing applications (e.g., digital audio workstations,
or DAWs) do not support the Open TL format, which makes the
options somewhat limited when importing sessions created in
other programs. In this case, you must manually import the Audio
Events from your Capture Session into the audio-editing application,
using whatever means possible in that program. Refer to the
documentation of your software for more information on this process.
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Note that in some cases, you may have more than one Audio Event on
a given track, as opposed to a single continuous Audio Event, or you
might have audio events that do not have the same start position. In
either case, it is highly recommended that you first export the audio
for each track before attempting to import into an audio-editing
program, as described in the Export Audio Files section of this section.
Tutorials
Be sure to have the Export Session option selected in the Export Audio
File menu as shown, so that the result of the process will be a single
continuous audio file for each track in the session.
Technical
Information
nce you have a single, continuous audio file for each track, directly
O
importing the files into an audio editor is much easier. All that is required
to reconstruct your Capture Session is to align each file at the same
start time.
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
106
Owner’s Manual
S oftware: Universal Control, SL Remote, Capture, and Studio One Artist7
Capture7.4
Close Session
Cntrl/Cmd+W
Save Session
Cntrl/Cmd+S
Save Session As
Cntrl/Cmd+Shift+S
Quit
Cntrl/Cmd+Q
Edit
Undo
Cntrl/Cmd+Z
Redo
Cntrl/Cmd+Y
Cut
Cntrl/Cmd+X
Copy
Cntrl/Cmd+C
Paste
Cntrl/Cmd+V
Delete
Del
Select All
Cntrl/Cmd+A
Deselect All
Cntrl/Cmd+D
Zoom In
Cntrl/Cmd + or E
Zoom Out
Cntrl/Cmd - or W
Zoom Full
F
Session
Import File
Command+I
Export to Audio File
Command+E
Insert Marker
Ins, I
Insert Named Marker
Shift+Ins, Shift+I
Locate Next Marker
N
Locate Previous Marker
B
Recall Marker 1-9
NumPad+1-9, Command+1-9
Mute Track
M
Solo Track
S
Arm Track
A
Tools
Select Arrow Tool
1
Select Range Tool
2
Select Split Tool
3
Select Eraser Tool
4
Transport
Toggle Start/Stop
Space Bar
Start
Enter
Record
NumPad *
Stop
NumPad 0
Return to Zero
NumPad .
Overview
Cntrl/Cntrl/Cmd+O
Hookup
Cntrl/Cntrl/Cmd+N
Open Session
Controls
New Session
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Connecting
to a
Computer
File
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Key Command
Tutorials
Action
Technical
Information
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
Key Commands
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
7.4.10 Capture Key Commands
107
7
Software: Universal Control, SL Remote, Capture, and Studio One Artist PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
7.4Capture
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Key Commands
...continued
Overview
Hookup
Controls
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Connecting
to a
Computer
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Tutorials
Action
Key Command
Navigation
Focus Next
Tab
Focus Previous
Shift+Tab
Left
Left Arrow
Extend Selection Left
Shift+Left Arrow
Extend Selection Left Add
Cntrl/Cmd+Shift+Left Arrow
Skip Left
Cntrl/Cmd+Left Arrow
Right
Right Arrow
Extend Selection Right
Shift+Right Arrow
Extend Selection Right Add
Cntrl/Cmd+Shift+Right Arrow
Skip Right
Cntrl/Cmd+Right Arrow
Up
Up Arrow
Extend Selection Up
Shift+Up Arrow
Extend Selection Up Add
Cntrl/Cmd+Shift+Up Arrow
Skip Up
Cntrl/Cmd+Up Arrow
Down
Down Arrow
Extend Selection Down
Shift+Down Arrow
Extend Selection Down Add
Cntrl/Cmd+Shift+Down Arrow
Skip Down
Cntrl/Cmd+Down Arrow
Page Up
Page Up
Extend Selection Page Up
Shift+Page Up
Extend Selection Page Up Add
Cntrl/Cmd+Shift+Page Up
Skip Page Up
Cntrl/Cmd+Page Up
Page Down
Page Down
Extend Selection Page Down
Shift+Page Down
Extend Selection Page Down Add
Cntrl/Cmd+Shift+Page Down
Skip Page Down
Cntrl/Cmd+Page Down
Start
Home
Extend Selection Start
Shift+Home
Extend Selection Start Add
Cntrl/Cmd+Shift+Home
Skip Start
Cntrl/Cmd+Home
End
End
Extend Selection End
Shift+End
Extend Selection End Add
Cntrl/Cmd+Shift+End
Skip End
Cntrl/Cmd+End
Technical
Information
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
108
Owner’s Manual
Software: Universal Control, SL Remote, Capture, and Studio One Artist7
Capture7.4
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
7.4.11 Capture Applications and Scenarios
Overview
When recording live, most people usually make a single, continuous
multitrack recording. This involves record-enabling Audio Tracks in
Capture, triggering recording, and continuing to record until the
performance is done. The following describes aspects of the liverecording workflow using the StudioLive mixer and Capture.
You should set input levels for each input channel on the
StudioLive mixer while preparing to mix the live performance.
If the hardware inputs on the StudioLive mixer are not clipping,
you do not need to worry about clipping in Capture.
Controls
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
Technical
Information
Tutorials
Once the desired tracks are record-enabled, and you have verified input
levels in Capture’s meter bridge, you are ready to begin recording.
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
After setting the input channels on the StudioLive mixer for pre/post
processing, the next step is to launch Capture and create a new Session.
Once in the new Session, record-enable each Audio Track you would like
to use, or just record-enable all of the Audio Tracks by clicking on the Arm
All button at the top of the Track column. If audio is streaming in from the
StudioLive and the Audio Tracks are record-enabled, you should see each
track’s input level displayed in the track’s level meter in the meter bridge.
Connecting
to a
Computer
Once the StudioLive mixer has been set up to mix a live performance, you
will need to decide, individually for each StudioLive channel, whether to
add pre- or post-Fat Channel dynamics processing and EQ to the signal
before it is sent to the computer. To switch between pre/post processing,
press the Post button (Dig Out subsection) in the Fat Channel section
for each input channel on the StudioLive mixer. If the Post button is
illuminated, the channel’s signal will be sent to your computer after it is
processed in the Fat Channel; if the Post button is not illuminated, the
signal will be sent without Fat Channel EQ and dynamics processing.
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
The StudioLive mixer is capable of mixing your live show with stunning
flexibility and ease, while Capture records the show to your computer.
This is possible because each input channel on the StudioLive mixer
has a hardwired output that continuously streams audio over FireWire
to your computer, and Capture is designed to record this stream.
Hookup
StudioLive Mixing and Recording a Live Performance
109
7
Software: Universal Control, SL Remote, Capture, and Studio One Artist PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
7.4Capture
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Worry-Free Live Recording
Overview
Many people are concerned when a computer is involved
while mixing a live show. While Capture has been engineered
to be remarkably stable, there are many variables on any
given computer that are not controlled by Capture.
Hookup
This is why the StudioLive mixer has been designed to be completely
independent of any computer to which it is connected. The
FireWire connection to the computer simply allows the computer
to receive audio outputs that are completely independent from
all other channels in the StudioLive mixer. Even if the computer
blows up during the live show, your live mix will be completely
unaffected. You can mix and record a live performance using the
StudioLive mixer and Capture with complete confidence.
Controls
Insert Markers While Recording
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
It is highly recommended that markers be inserted during
the recording of a live performance, as the markers will make
the rest of the production process much easier. Each of the
examples that follow begins with the same scenario:
Connecting
to a
Computer
You are mixing and recording a live show using the StudioLive
mixer and Capture. You start recording before the start of the
actual performance, and you will not stop recording until the end
of the performance. During the performance, you insert a marker
during the break between each song of the ten-song set. At the
end of the set, you stop recording and save the Session. You are
then ready to shut down your system. (Remember to shut down
in the proper sequence: first turn the master level down on the
StudioLive mixer, then turn off power amps and speakers, shut down
the computer, and power down the StudioLive, in that order.)
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Basic Example
Tutorials
The band you recorded the previous night comes over the next day to
check out the recordings. You launch Capture, open the Session, and
begin playback through the StudioLive mixer. After half a minute of
tense silence while the band wonders what went wrong, you realize
that the band did not start the actual performance until 20 minutes
after you started recording because the lead singer took so long to
get on stage. (It is, of course, traditional to blame the lead singer!)
Technical
Information
You click on the Next Marker button in the Capture Transport to
quickly advance to the next marker, which is the first song of the
set, and the band perks up. The band thinks they played terribly
during the first song, and they want to skip to the next song to
see if they did any better. You click on the Next Marker button
again, and the next song starts immediately. The band listens to a
bit of each song, and you skip through the whole set within a few
minutes as if you were skipping through finished tracks on a CD.
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
The band is so impressed with the quality of the recording and your
production skills that they hire you on the spot to mix the show and turn
it into a live-performance album they can release to their adoring fans.
110
S oftware: Universal Control, SL Remote, Capture, and Studio One Artist7
Capture7.4
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Advanced Example
Capture will then automatically generate separate audio files
for each track in each song. The names of the files will be based
on the name you specified in the Export to Audio File menu, the
names of the markers, and the track names in your Session (Export
Name-Track Name-Marker Name). You can then import the files
for each song into a new Capture Session, or into a different audio
recording application, to be mixed with the StudioLive mixer.
A few days after the original performance, you have
finished producing a ten-song live album for the band you
recorded, and they could not be more impressed.
The studio-recording process often appears very different from the liverecording process. However, the StudioLive mixer and Capture are equally
at home in the studio and in concert. The following describes aspects of
the studio-recording workflow using the StudioLive mixer and Capture.
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Overdubbing
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Controls
To do this, first open the original Session. If you have not already done
so, rename each marker to the desired name for each song. Then, select
Export to Audio File from the Session menu. In the Export to Audio
File menu’s Options section, select Export Tracks and Each Marker, and
set the Format to the desired file-format settings. Then click OK.
Hookup
Overview
The day after the gig, you prepare to mix the previous night’s live
recording in your personal studio. You realize that each song will
probably be mixed in a different way. Wouldn’t it be convenient if
you could break up the original, continuous recording of the entire
set of ten songs so you could work on one song at a time? With
Capture, you can use the markers you inserted between each song to
automatically generate all the multitrack files for each individual song.
Connecting
to a
Computer
Owner’s Manual
In a studio-recording session, as opposed to recording live, you might
wish to record on only a few tracks, or on a single track at a time, and
then record more later. This process of adding to your recorded tracks
later is called “overdubbing.” Using Capture and the StudioLive mixer,
you can play recorded audio on any tracks through the StudioLive
mixer and simultaneously record new audio to tracks in Capture.
Technical
Information
Tutorials
To do this, it is a good idea to first establish a good mix to listen
to while recording. Just as when creating monitor mixes for a live
performance with the StudioLive mixer, you can create a number of
mixes to listen to. For instance, you might create a stereo mix of the
playback from Capture on Auxes 1 and 2 for a guitarist who is about
to overdub a lead-guitar part. To accomplish this, do the following:
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
For all input channels on the StudioLive mixer on which you
wish to play tracks from Capture, engage the FireWire return
by pressing each channel’s FireWire Return button so that it
illuminates. This will route the output of the tracks in Capture
to their respective input channels on the StudioLive mixer.
111
7
Software: Universal Control, SL Remote, Capture, and Studio One Artist PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
7.4Capture
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Start playback in Capture. The output from each track in Capture
will play through their respective input channels on the StudioLive
mixer (Capture Track 1 on StudioLive Channel 1, etc.).
Overview
At this point, link Aux 1 and 2 on the StudioLive mixer and create a mix for
the linked Aux1/2 by adjusting the level for each input channel that has
playback coming from Capture. This is a stereo aux mix, so you can also
access the pan for each input channel in the mix by pressing the Mix/Pan
button for Aux 2. (For details on how to set aux mixes, see Section 4.4.3.)
Hookup
Now you can plug the guitar or guitar-amp mic into an input
channel on the StudioLive mixer and set the input level as you
normally would. Then add the guitar-input channel to the Aux
1/2 mix that the guitarist will listen to so he can hear himself.
Controls
If you record-enable the Audio Track that corresponds to the
guitar input channel in Capture, you should see that track’s
level meter showing live input in the meter bridge.
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
With the Aux 1/2 mix set so that the guitarist can hear his live guitarplaying and the tracks from Capture, you are ready to record the
lead guitar. You can position the playback cursor to any point in the
Timeline so that recording starts there or just start recording from the
beginning of the Session. Once you have the lead-guitar part recorded,
you might find a few things you would like to correct in the part. This
is where punching, as described in the next section, comes in handy.
Connecting
to a
Computer
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Tutorials
Technical
Information
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
112
Owner’s Manual
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Studio One Artist Quick Start
Installation and Authorization
Once you have installed the StudioLive drivers and connected your
StudioLive to your computer, you can use the PreSonus Studio One
Artist music-production software included with your StudioLive to
begin recording, mixing, and producing your music. To install Studio
One Artist, insert your installation disc into your computer’s DVD drive.
Follow the onscreen instructions to complete the installation process.
Connecting
to a
Computer
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
7.5.1
Tutorials
Studio One Artist was designed for easy integration with both
the StudioLive and Capture. Sessions recorded in Capture can be
opened directly in Studio One; no exporting or importing is required.
Any markers, edits, and so on that are made in Capture will be
preserved when the Capture session is opened in Studio One.
Technical
Information
Your StudioLive 16.0.2 comes with Studio One Artist recording and
production software. Whether you are about to record your first
album or your fiftieth, Studio One Artist provides you with all of the
tools necessary to capture and mix a great performance. As a valued
PreSonus customer, you are also eligible for an upgrade discount for
Studio One Pro when you are ready to master your work, create a digital
version for the Web, or incorporate third-party VST plug-ins into your
recording process. For more details on the Studio One Pro upgrade
program for PreSonus customers, please visit www.presonus.com.
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Controls
Hookup
Overview
7.5
S oftware: Universal Control, SL Remote, Capture, and Studio One Artist7
Capture7.4
113
7
7.5
Software: Universal Control, SL Remote, Capture, and Studio One Artist PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
Studio One Artist Quick Start
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Running the Studio One Installer
To Install Studio One Artist, insert your Studio One Artist installation DVD
into your computer’s DVD drive.
Overview
•• Windows Users: Launch the Studio One Artist
installer and follow the onscreen instructions.
•• Mac Users: Drag the Studio One Artist application into
the Applications folder on your Macintosh HD.
Hookup
Creating a User Account
Controls
•• After installing Studio One Artist, launch the program, and the
Activate Studio One menu will appear. If you are a new Studio One
user, you will need to create a user account. Follow the Create
Account link if your computer is connected to the Internet. Once
you have created your account, continue activating Studio One
Artist online.
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
•• If your computer is not connected to the Internet, visit the Studio
One product page at www.presonus.com on an Internet-connected
computer to create your account. After you have created your
account, skip to “Activating Studio One Artist Offline.”
Connecting
to a
Computer
Activating Studio One Artist Online
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
•• Now that you have created a user account, you can activate your
copy of Studio One Artist. Launch Studio One Artist, and the
Activate Studio One menu will appear.
•• Click on the Activate Online link and enter your previously
created account username, password, and the product key
you received with the Studio One Artist installation disc. Click
on the Activate button to finish the activation process.
••
Tutorials
Technical
Information
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
114
Activating Studio One Artist Offline
•• Once you have created a user account, launch Studio One Artist. From
the Activate Studio One Menu, click on the Activate Offline link. Follow
the instructions to log in to your previously created user account, register
the product, and obtain a license file.
Connecting
to a
Computer
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
Technical
Information
•• Upon completing the Studio One Artist installation
and activation process, the Studio One Content
Installer will appear. If it does not appear, navigate to
Help/Studio One Installation.
•• At the top of the installation menu, select the source
from which the content will be installed, as well as
the location where you wish to install the content.
The source of the content will be the same DVD from
which you installed Studio One Artist. By default,
Studio One Artist will point to your DVD drive as the
content source. Listed in the installation menu are
separate entries for each available item. Click the
checkbox next to each item you wish to install, then
click on the Install Packets button at the bottom left of
the menu to install the selected content.
•• When finished installing content, click on the Done
button to exit the menu.
Studio One Artist content can be installed at any time by accessing
the Help/Studio One Installation menu. If you choose not to install
any portion of the content, you can install it at a later time.
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Studio One Artist comes bundled with an array of demo
and tutorial material, instruments, loops, samples, and
other third-party content. The Studio One Artist bundle
includes all that you need to begin producing music.
Tutorials
Installing Bundled Content for Studio One Artist
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Controls
Hookup
•• Next, copy the license file to the computer on which Studio One has
been installed and locate the license file as instructed in the Activate
Studio One menu. The activation process is now complete.
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
S oftware: Universal Control, SL Remote, Capture, and Studio One Artist7
Studio One Artist Quick Start 7.5
Overview
Owner’s Manual
115
7
7.5
Software: Universal Control, SL Remote, Capture, and Studio One Artist PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
Studio One Artist Quick Start
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
7.5.2
Enabling the Audio Driver
Overview
Studio One and Studio One Artist were designed with PreSonus
interfaces in mind. Your StudioLive is already integrated into
Studio One Artist, so setup is quick and easy. When Studio One
Artist is launched, by default you will be taken to the Start page.
On this page, you will find document-management and deviceconfiguration controls, as well as a customizable artist profile, a news
feed, and links to demos and tutorials from PreSonus. If you have an
Internet connection on your computer, these links will be updated
as new tutorials become available on the PreSonus Web site.
Hookup
Controls
Complete information on all aspects of Studio One Artist is
available in the Reference Manual PDF located on the Studio
One Artist installation disc. The information in this tutorial covers
only the basic aspects of Studio One Artist and is intended
to get you set up and recording as quickly as possible.
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Start Page: Setup Area Shows Active Audio Driver and Sample Rate and Provides
Quick Links to Configure Audio and MIDI.
In the middle of the Start page, you will see the Setup
area. Studio One Artist automatically scans your
system for all available drivers and selects a driver. By
default, it will choose a PreSonus driver if one is
available.
Connecting
to a
Computer
Selecting a Different Audio Driver
from the Start Page
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Your StudioLive uses the same driver as the FireStudio
family of interfaces. If you do not see “PreSonus
FireStudio” on the Start page when you launch Studio
One, click on the Configure Audio Devices link in the
Setup area to open the Audio Setup Options window.
In the Audio Device menu, select “PreSonus FireStudio.”
Click the Apply button and then OK.
After you have verified that the PreSonus FireStudio Universal
driver has been detected, please continue to the next section to
set up your external MIDI devices. If you do not have any MIDI
devices to connect at this time, please skip to Section 7.5.4.
Tutorials
7.5.3
Configuring Your MIDI Devices
Technical
Information
From the External Devices window in Studio One Artist, you can
configure your MIDI keyboard controller, sound modules, and control
surfaces. This section will take you through setting up your MIDI
keyboard controller and sound module. Please consult the Reference
Manual located on your Studio One Artist installation DVD for complete
setup instructions for other MIDI devices. Before beginning this section,
you must first install the drivers for your MIDI interface or USB MIDI
Controller keyboard. Please consult the documentation that came
with your MIDI hardware for complete installation instructions.
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
116
1. You can set up your external MIDI devices from the
Setup area in the Start page. Before we set up a
new Song for recording, let’s take a moment to
configure external devices.
Overview
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
2. C
onnect the MIDI Out of your external MIDI
controller to a MIDI In on your MIDI interface.
If you are using a USB MIDI controller, connect
it to your computer and power it on.
Hookup
A MIDI keyboard controller is a hardware device that is generally used
for playing and controlling other MIDI devices, virtual instruments, and
software parameters. In Studio One Artist, these devices are referred to
as Keyboards, and they must be configured before they are available
for use. In some cases, your MIDI keyboard controller is also used as a
tone generator. Studio One Artist views the two functions of these types
of hardware as two different devices: a MIDI keyboard controller and a
sound module. The MIDI controls (keyboard, knobs, faders, etc.) will be
set up as a Keyboard. The sound module will be set up as an Instrument.
Controls
Setting Up an External MIDI Keyboard Controller from the Start Page
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
S oftware: Universal Control, SL Remote, Capture, and Studio One Artist7
Studio One Artist Quick Start 7.5
3. C
lick on the Configure External Devices
link in the Setup area on the Start page to
launch the External Devices window.
Connecting
to a
Computer
4. Click the Add button.
6. F rom the menu on the left, select New
Keyboard. At this point, you can customize
the name of your keyboard by entering
the manufacturer and device names.
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
Technical
Information
7. Y
ou must specify which MIDI channels will be used
to communicate with this keyboard. For most
purposes, you should select all MIDI channels. If you
are unsure of which MIDI channels to select, select
all 16.
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
5. The Add Device window will launch.
Tutorials
Owner’s Manual
117
7
7.5
Software: Universal Control, SL Remote, Capture, and Studio One Artist PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
Studio One Artist Quick Start
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
8. In the Receive From drop-down menu, select the
MIDI-interface input from which Studio One Artist
will receive MIDI data.
Overview
In the Send To drop-down menu, select the MIDI interface output
from which Studio One Artist will send MIDI data to your keyboard.
If your keyboard controller does not need to receive MIDI data
from Studio One (say, for moving motorized faders and the like),
you can leave this unselected. If your keyboard does need to
receive MIDI data, you must connect a MIDI cable from the MIDI
Out of the MIDI interface to the MIDI In of the keyboard.
Hookup
Controls
9. If this is the only keyboard that you will use to control your external
synthesizers and virtual instruments, you should check the box next to
Default Instrument Input. This will automatically assign your keyboard
to control all MIDI devices in Studio One Artist.
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Click OK.
If you have a sound module you’d like to connect, leave the External
Devices window open, and proceed to the next part of this section.
If not, you can close this window and skip to Section 7.4.4.
Setting up an External MIDI Sound Module from the Start Page
Connecting
to a
Computer
MIDI instrument controllers (keyboards, MIDI guitars, etc.) send
musical information in the form of MIDI data to tone modules, which
respond by generating sound, as instructed. Tone modules can be
standalone sound devices or can be integrated into a MIDI instrument,
such as a keyboard synthesizer. Studio One Artist refers to all tone
generators as Instruments. Once you have set up your MIDI keyboard
controller, take a moment to configure your sound module.
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
1. Connect the MIDI In of your external sound module
to the MIDI Out of your MIDI interface.
2. In the External Devices window, click the Add
button.
Tutorials
Technical
Information
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
118
S oftware: Universal Control, SL Remote, Capture, and Studio One Artist7
Studio One Artist Quick Start 7.5
4. F rom the menu on the left, select “New
Instrument.” At this point, you can customize
the name of your sound module by entering
the manufacturer and device names.
6. In the Send To drop-down menu, select the MIDI-interface output from
which Studio One Artist will send MIDI data to your sound module.
In the Receive From drop-down menu, select the MIDI-interface
output from which Studio One Artist will receive MIDI data from
your sound module. If your sound module will not need to send
information to Studio One, you can leave this unspecified.
1. From the Start page, select “Create a new Song.”
2. In the browser window, name your Song and
choose the directory in which you’d like it saved.
You’ll notice a list of templates on the left. The
StudioLive template will create a Song with a track
for each of the 16 inputs. Every track is armed for
recording, and no further setup is required. Select
this template and click “OK.”
3. The rest of this section will guide you through
creating a Song from an empty session.
Technical
Information
Now that you’ve configured your MIDI devices, let’s create a
new Song. We‘ll start by setting up your default audio I/O.
Tutorials
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Creating a New Song
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
7.5.4
Connecting
to a
Computer
Click OK and close the External Devices window. You are
now ready to start recording in Studio One Artist. The
rest of this Quick Start Guide will go over how to set up
a Song and will discuss some general workflow tips for
navigating through the Studio One Artist environment.
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Controls
5. S pecify which MIDI channels will be used to
communicate with this keyboard. For most
purposes, you should select all MIDI channels. If
you are unsure of which MIDI channels to select, we
suggest you select all 16.
Overview
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
3. The Add Device window will launch.
Hookup
Owner’s Manual
119
7
7.5
Software: Universal Control, SL Remote, Capture, and Studio One Artist PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
Studio One Artist Quick Start
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
4. To begin a new Song, select Empty Song from the
Templates list. At this point, you should give your
Song a name and select your preferred sample rate
and bit depth. You can also determine the length of
your Song and the type of time format you would
like to use (Notation Bars, Seconds, Samples, or
Frames). Click the OK button when you are finished.
Overview
Hookup
5. If you plan on importing loops into your
Song, you may want to select Stretch Audio
Loops to Song Tempo so that any loop of a
known BPM (like those in the included content
library) will import at the correct tempo.
Controls
6. When the Song window launches, launch the Audio
Setup window by going to File | Options…
(Windows) or Studio One | Preferences (Mac), and
click on the Audio Setup button.
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Connecting
to a
Computer
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
7. Click on the Song Setup button to open the
Song Setup window, then click on the Audio
I/O Setup icon.
8. Click on the Inputs tab in the Audio I/O Setup
window, and you will see all of the available inputs
on your StudioLive. At this time, you can add the
number and type of inputs you plan to use.
Tutorials
Technical
Information
9. W
e recommend that you create a mono input for
each of the 16 inputs on your StudioLive. If you
plan on recording in stereo, you should also create
a stereo bus and assign it to the appropriate set of
inputs. You can remove any bus by simply selecting
it and clicking the Remove button. To customize the
names of your buses, double-click on the default
name to open a text box. When you have finished
typing, hit Enter.
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
120
S oftware: Universal Control, SL Remote, Capture, and Studio One Artist7
Studio One Artist Quick Start 7.5
13. If you would like this output configuration
available every time you launch Studio One
Artist, click the Make Default button.
Creating Audio Tracks
1. In the upper left corner of the Arrange window, you
will notice several buttons. The middle button is the
Add Tracks button. Click this button to bring up the
Add Tracks window.
Hookup
Technical
Information
Tutorials
2. In the Add Tracks window, you can select the
number and type of tracks you’d like to create
(Mono Audio, Stereo Audio, Instrument, or
Automation) and can customize the track name
and color.
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
7.5.5
Connecting
to a
Computer
14. Now that you’ve configured your MIDI and
audio I/O and created a new Song, let’s
go through some of the basics of Studio
One Artist so you can start recording!
Controls
12. We recommend that you create a mono output for
each of the 16 FireWire returns on your StudioLive,
as well as one stereo output assigned to FireWire
returns 1-2 to use for your stereo main output. In
the lower right corner, you will see the Audition
select menu. This allows you to choose the output
from which you will audition audio files prior to
importing them into Studio One Artist. In general,
you will want this to be the main output bus.
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
11. Click on the Outputs tab, and you will see all of the
available outputs on your StudioLive. At this time,
you can add the number of output buses to which
you would like to have access and can give them
names.
Overview
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
10. If you would like the same inputs to be
available every time you launch Studio One
Artist, click the “Make Default” button.
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Owner’s Manual
121
7
7.5
Software: Universal Control, SL Remote, Capture, and Studio One Artist PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
Studio One Artist Quick Start
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
3. Once you have added your tracks, you can assign the
input by simply clicking on the input to which a track is
currently assigned. This will bring up the inputs list. You
can also access the audio I/O setup from here.
Overview
4. If you would like to add a track for each of the available
inputs and have the routing automatically assigned,
simply go to Track | Add Tracks for All Inputs.
Hookup
5. T o begin recording, create an audio track, assign it
to input 1, and connect a microphone to the first
channel on the StudioLive. Select Record Enable on
your track in Studio One Artist. Turn up the Channel
1 fader while speaking/singing into the microphone.
You should see the input meter in Studio One Artist
react to the input. Adjust the gain so the input level
is near its maximum without clipping (distorting).
Controls
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
6. C
onnect a set of headphones to the StudioLive
headphone output and select the Main button in
the Monitor section on your StudioLive. You may
also wish to connect monitors to the StudioLive‘s
control-room outputs. You are now ready to record.
For complete instructions, please consult the
Studio One Reference Manual, which is located
on your Studio One Artist installation DVD.
Connecting
to a
Computer
7.5.6
Creating MIDI Tracks
7. Click on the Add Tracks button. When the Add Tracks window launches,
select Instrument as the track format and click the OK button.
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Tutorials
8. To assign your MIDI input, click on the MIDI Inputs list and select your
external sound module.
If you have added virtual inputs to your session,
you will also see them as available inputs.
Technical
Information
If you selected your MIDI keyboard controller as the default keyboard,
it will already be selected. If not, choose your MIDI controller from the
Output menu directly below.
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
122
9. To the left of the Add Track button, you will find the Inspector button.
Click it to display more parameters for the selected track.
10. At the bottom of the Inspector menu, you will see your Bank and
Program selections. From here, you can remotely change the patch on
your sound module.
Controls
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Adding Virtual Instruments and Plug-in Effects to Your Song
You can add plug-ins and instruments to your Song by draggingand-dropping from the browser. You can also drag an effect
or group of effects from one channel to another, drag in
customized effects chains, and instantly load your favorite virtualinstrument patch without ever scrolling through a menu.
Opening the Browser
In the lower right corner of the Arrange window are three buttons. The
Edit button opens or closes the audio editor or the MIDI piano-roll editor,
depending on which type of track is selected. The Mix button opens and
closes the mixer window.
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
Technical
Information
Tutorials
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
The Browse button opens the browser window, which displays all of
the available virtual instruments, plug-in effects, audio files, and MIDI
files, as well as the pool of audio files loaded into the current session.
Connecting
to a
Computer
7.5.7
Hookup
MIDI data does not contain audio signals. To hear your sound
module, you must connect the audio output of the sound
module to a StudioLive input, then connect the StudioLive’s
audio outputs to a sound system. (You also can listen on
headphones, using the headphone output.) When you are
ready to mix your Song, you must convert the recorded MIDI
data to an audio waveform by recording a new audio track.
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
S oftware: Universal Control, SL Remote, Capture, and Studio One Artist7
Studio One Artist Quick Start 7.5
Overview
Owner’s Manual
123
7
7.5
Software: Universal Control, SL Remote, Capture, and Studio One Artist PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
Studio One Artist Quick Start
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Drag-and-Drop Virtual Instruments
Overview
To add a virtual instrument to your session, click the
Browse and Instrument buttons to open the
instrument browser. Select the instrument or one of its
patches from the instrument browser and drag it into
the Arrange view. Studio One Artist will automatically
create a new track and load the instrument as the
input.
Hookup
Controls
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Drag-and-Drop Effects
Connecting
to a
Computer
To add a plug-in effect to a track, click the Effects
button and select it or one of its presets in the effects
browser, then drag it over the track to which you
would like to add it.
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Tutorials
Technical
Information
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
124
Owner’s Manual
Using Studio One to Remote-Control StudioLive 16.0.2
These setup instructions will enable you to quickly configure Studio
One Artist to control your StudioLive, while giving you the information
necessary for you to create your own custom configuration.
Technical
Information
Tutorials
You must first set up your StudioLive for MIDI control, so navigate to Pages 4 and 5
of your StudioLive system menu and set each page up as shown in these images:
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Connecting
to a
Computer
The StudioLive 16.0.2’s MIDI Control mode enables you to control your
mixer from a DAW via MIDI. Even better, you don’t need to worry about
connecting an external MIDI interface because your StudioLive 16.0.2
can receive MIDI control messages over its FireWire connection!
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
7.5.8
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Controls
Audio and MIDI files can be quickly located,
auditioned, and imported into your Song by dragging
them from the file browser into the Arrange view. If
you drag the file to an empty space, a new track will
be created with that file placed at the position to
which you dragged it. If you drag the file to an existing
track, the file will be placed as a new part on the track.
Hookup
Drag-and-Drop Audio and MIDI Files
Overview
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
S oftware: Universal Control, SL Remote, Capture, and Studio One Artist7
Studio One Artist Quick Start 7.5
125
7
7.5
Software: Universal Control, SL Remote, Capture, and Studio One Artist PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
Studio One Artist Quick Start
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Configuring StudioLive 16.0.2 as a MIDI Device
To configure your StudioLive 16.0.2 so it can be controlled by Studio
One Artist, you must first add the StudioLive as an external device.
Overview
1. From the Studio One Artist Start page, click on the External Devices link.
Hookup
2. Click on the Add button.
3. Select “New Instrument.”
4. In the Device Name field, enter “StudioLive.”
Controls
5. From the Send To menu select “PreSonus FireStudio Port 1.”
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
6. Click the All button to enable all MIDI channels.
7. Click OK.
8. In the StudioLive System menu, navigate to Page 4: MIDI Presets.
9. Set MIDI Control Mode to “ON.”
10. Set MIDI Source to “FireWire.”
Connecting
to a
Computer
Recalling Scenes and Presets:
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
1. For our example, you have to set different MIDI channels to recall Scenes,
FXA Presets, and FXB Presets. These are the MIDI channels on which
Studio One will send Program Change messages for each function.
2. In Studio One, create a new Song and then create an Instrument track.
Tutorials
3. In the Output menu, select “StudioLive.”
Technical
Information
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
126
Owner’s Manual
S oftware: Universal Control, SL Remote, Capture, and Studio One Artist7
Studio One Artist Quick Start 7.5
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
4. Open the Inspector.
MIDI channel 1 is already selected so let’s change a StudioLive Scene.
Overview
5. Check the box next to Program.
6. Double-click on the Prog field and type in the
number of the Scene you wish to recall.
Hookup
You can recall FX presets using the same steps. Don’t
forget to change the MIDI channel!
Controls
Controlling FXA, FXB, and Main Output Levels:
1. In Studio One, select the Pencil tool.
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
2. Using the Pencil tool, draw a MIDI
region several bars long.
3. Set the MIDI channel for the Instrument track to 4.
Connecting
to a
Computer
4. In the Track menu, select Add Automation Track.
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
5. On the Automation track, click on the parameter menu and select “Add/
Remove.”
6. From the Automation window, select “External Devices 1 StudioLive MIDI.”
7. Select CH 4.
Tutorials
8. Scroll through the MIDI Control Change list until you find Controls 40-42.
9. Select these controls and click Add.
Technical
Information
10. Click Close.
11. Select Control 42 from the parameter pull-down menu on the automation
track.
13. Press Play to hear Studio One control the main output level of your StudioLive.
127
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
12. Using your Pencil tool, draw an automation curve.
7
7.5
Software: Universal Control, SL Remote, Capture, and Studio One Artist PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
Studio One Artist Quick Start
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
You can use the same steps to create volume-curve automation for
FXA and FXB output levels on your StudioLive mixer. Just be sure
to select the right Control Change number from the parameter
pull-down menu on the automation track in Studio One!
Overview
Assigning/Unassigning FXA and FXB to the Main Bus
Follow Steps 1-7 to control FXA, FXB, and Main Output levels.
Hookup
1. Scroll through the MIDI Control Change list until you find Sustain
Pedal On/Off (CC 64) and Sustenuto Pedal On/Off (CC 66). Unlike
volume control, the mute controls require On/Off messages;
therefore, we recommend using these two Control Change numbers
when controlling the StudioLive 16.0.2 with Studio One Artist.
Controls
2. Select each control and click Add.
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
3. Click Close.
4. Select Sustain Pedal On/Off from the Parameter pulldown menu on the automation track.
5. Using your Pencil tool, draw an “ON” message that lasts for several bars.
Connecting
to a
Computer
6. Note that the FXA/FXB assignment to the main bus is a simple toggle, so
when it receives its CC message, the button will be put into the opposite of
its current state. If you want the “On” state in Studio One to turn the button
on, the button will need to be in the “Off” state when it receives the message.
7. Press Play to watch and hear Studio One assign
and unassign FXA to the Main bus.
Software: Universal Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
These same steps can be used to control FXB assign/unassign to
the Main bus. Just be sure to select the correct Control Change
message from the Automation track’s parameter menu.
Tutorials
Technical
Information
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
128
Owner’s Manual
Tutorials8
Microphone Types 8.1
Microphone Types
8.1.2
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Condenser microphones generally capture sound with excellent fidelity and are one
of the most popular microphone choices for studio recording and, increasingly, for
live performance as well. Condenser microphones require a power source, which
can be provided by a small battery, an external power supply, or phantom power,
which is usually provided by a mixer, preamplifier, or direct (DI) box. Phantom power
is sent over the same mic cable that carries the audio signal; the term derives from
the fact that there is no visible power cord, and the voltage is not perceptible in the
audio path. The StudioLive sends 48 VDC phantom power from the XLR inputs only.
Hookup
Condenser
Controls
8.1.1
Overview
The StudioLive works with most types of microphones, including
dynamic, ribbon, and condenser microphones.
Dynamic
Dynamic microphones are possibly the most widely used microphone
type, especially in live shows. They are relatively inexpensive, resistant
to physical damage, and typically handle high sound-pressure levels
(SPL) very well. Unlike condenser microphones, dynamic microphones
typically do not require a power source. In most cases, phantom power
has no effect on a dynamic microphone’s audio quality or sensitivity.
Dynamic microphones, especially ribbon microphones, tend to generate low output
voltages, so they typically need more preamp gain than condenser microphones.
Connecting
to a
Computer
8.1
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
8.0 Tutorials
Ribbon
Software:
Software Universal
Universal Control,
Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Ribbon microphones are a special type of dynamic microphone and
get their name from the thin metal ribbon used in their design. Ribbon
microphones capture sound with very high fidelity—especially higher
frequencies. However, they often are very fragile (many newer models
are less so) and typically cannot handle high sound-pressure levels.
Tutorials
Most ribbon microphones do not require phantom power. In fact, unless a
ribbon microphone specifically calls for phantom power, sending phantom
power to a ribbon microphone can severely damage it—usually beyond repair.
8.1.3 USB Microphones and Other Types
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
Technical
Information
Many microphone types are available, and as technology evolves, it is likely
that more will be developed. One type of microphone to emerge recently is the
USB microphone. These may be dynamic or condenser mics, but many of them
have built-in preamps and need drivers to work with computers. Because a USB
microphone is, in effect, an audio interface, we recommended that you not use
them with the StudioLive, as the likelihood of conflicting drivers is great.
If you are using a new or nonstandard type of microphone (e.g.,
USB, headset, laser, MEMS), please consult your microphone’s user’s
manual for power requirement and compatibility information.
129
PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
8Tutorials
8.1 Microphone Types
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Regardless of the microphone type you are using, we recommend
reading your microphone’s user’s manual thoroughly before
engaging phantom power and if other usage questions arise.
Overview
8.1.4
Microphone Placement
Hookup
The following are a few recording applications to help you get started with your
StudioLive. These are by no means the only ways to record these instruments.
Microphone selection and placement is an art. For more information, visit
your library or local bookstore, as there are many books and magazines
about recording techniques. The Internet is also a great source of recording
information, as are instructional videos. Some of these microphone-placement
suggestions can be used in live applications, as well as for studio recording.
Controls
Grand Piano
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Place one microphone above the high strings and one
microphone above the low strings. Experiment with
distance (the farther back the more room you will
capture). This technique can be used for live and
studio applications.
Connecting
to a
Computer
Electric Guitar
Software:
Software Universal
Universal Control,
Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Place a dynamic microphone an inch or two away
from the speaker of the guitar amplifier. Experiment
with exact location. If you are recording an amp with
multiple speakers, experiment with each one to see if
one sounds better than the others. Place a condenser
microphone approximately six feet away, pointed at
the amp. Experiment with distance. Also experiment
with inverting the phase of the room microphone to
check for phase cancellation and reinforcement.
(Select the “fuller”-sounding position.) To use this
technique in a live application, omit the condenser
microphone.
Tutorials
Technical
Information
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
130
Acoustic Guitar
Connecting
to a
Computer
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
Technical
Information
Tutorials
Plug the electric bass guitar into a passive direct box.
Connect the instrument output from the passive
direct box to a bass amplifier. Place a dynamic
microphone an inch or two away from the speaker
and connect it to a StudioLive microphone input.
Connect the line output from the passive direct box to
a line input on a different channel of the StudioLive.
For recording, place these signals on separate tracks.
During mixing, you can blend the direct and amplifier
signal to taste. This technique can also be used in live
applications.
Software:
Software Universal
Universal Control,
Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Bass Guitar (Direct and Speaker)
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Controls
Point a small-diaphragm condenser microphone at
the 12th fret, approximately 8 inches away. Point a
large-diaphragm condenser microphone at the bridge
of the guitar, approximately 12 inches from the guitar.
Experiment with distances and microphone
placement. Another popular method is using an XY
microphone placement with two small-diaphragm
condenser microphones. (See drum-overheads photo
on the next page.)
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Tutorials8
Microphone Types 8.1
Overview
Hookup
Owner’s Manual
131
8Tutorials
8.1 Microphone Types
PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Drum Overheads (XY example)
Overview
Place two small-diaphragm condenser microphones
on an XY stereo-microphone holder (bar). Position the
microphones so that each one is at a 45-degree angle,
pointed down at the drum kit, approximately 7 or 8
feet above the floor or drum riser. Experiment with
height. This technique can be used in live applications
as well.
Hookup
Controls
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Snare Drum (top and bottom)
Connecting
to a
Computer
Software:
Software Universal
Universal Control,
Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Point a dynamic microphone at the center of the
snare, making sure it is placed so that the drummer
will not hit it. Place a small-diaphragm condenser
microphone under the drum, pointed at the snares.
Experiment with the placement of both microphones.
Also experiment with inverting the phase of the
bottom microphone. This technique can be used in
live applications.
Tutorials
Technical
Information
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
132
Owner’s Manual
Tutorials8
A Brief Tutorial on Dynamics Processing 8.2
A Brief Tutorial on Dynamics Processing
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
8.2
Common Questions Regarding Dynamics Processing
Hookup
8.2.1
Overview
The heart of the StudioLive is the Fat Channel dynamics section. What follows
is an excerpt from brief tutorial on dynamics processing written by PreSonus
president and founder Jim Odom. It is included to help you get the most out
of your StudioLive. This tutorial will take you through the basics of dynamics
processing and will explain the various types of dynamics processors.
What is dynamic range?
Controls
Dynamic range can be defined as the ratio between the loudest possible audio
level and the lowest possible level. For example, if a processor states that the
maximum input level before distortion is +24 dBu, and the output noise floor
is -92 dBu, then the processor has a total dynamic range of 24 + 92 = 116 dB.
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
On average, the dynamic range of an orchestral performance can range
from -50 dBu to +10 dBu. This equates to a 60 dB dynamic range. Although
60 dB may not appear to be a large dynamic range, do the math, and
you’ll discover that +10 dBu is 1,000 times louder than -50 dBu!
Rock music, on the other hand, has a much smaller dynamic range:
typically -10 dBu to +10 dBu, or 20 dB. This makes mixing the various
signals of a rock performance together a much more tedious task.
Connecting
to a
Computer
Why do we need compression?
Software:
Software Universal
Universal Control,
Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Consider the previous discussion: You are mixing a rock performance with an
average dynamic range of 20 dB. You wish to add an uncompressed vocal to the
mix. The average dynamic range of an uncompressed vocal is around 40 dB. In
other words, a vocal performance can go from -30 dBu to +10 dBu. The passages
that are +10 dBu and higher will be heard over the mix. However, the passages
that are at -30 dBu and below will never be heard over the roar of the rest of the
mix. A compressor can be used in this situation to reduce (compress) the dynamic
range of the vocal to around 10 dB. The vocal can now be placed at around +5
dBu. At this level, the dynamic range of the vocal is from 0 dBu to +10 dBu. The
lower level phrases will now be well above the lower level of the mix, and louder
phrases will not overpower the mix, allowing the vocal to “sit in the track.”
This question may lead many folks to say “absolutely not, overcompression is
horrible.” That statement can be qualified by defining overcompression. The term
itself must have been derived from the fact that you can hear the compressor
working. A well-designed and properly adjusted compressor should not be audible!
Therefore, the overcompressed sound is likely to be an improper adjustment on
a particular instrument—unless, of course, it is done intentionally for effect.
133
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
Does every instrument need compression?
Technical
Information
Tutorials
The same points can be made about any instrument in the mix. Each instrument
has its place, and a good compressor can assist the engineer in the overall blend.
8Tutorials
8.2 A Brief Tutorial on Dynamics Processing
PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Why do the best consoles in the world put compressors on every channel?
The answer is simply that most instruments need some form of
compression, often very subtle, to be properly heard in a mix.
Overview
Why do we need noise gates?
Hookup
Consider the compressed vocal example discussed earlier; you now have a
20 dB dynamic range for the vocal channel. Problems arise when noise or
instruments (air conditioner, loud drummer, etc.) in the background of the
vocal mic become more audible after the lower end of the dynamic range is
raised. You might attempt to mute the vocal between phrases in an attempt to
remove the unwanted sounds; however, this would probably end disastrously.
A better method is to use a noise gate. The noise-gate threshold could be
set at the bottom of the dynamic range of the vocal, say -10 dBu, such that
the gate would shut out the unwanted signals between the phrases.
Controls
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
If you have ever mixed live sound, you know the problems cymbals can create
by bleeding through the tom mics. As soon as you add some highs to get some
snap out of the tom, the cymbals come crashing through, placing the horn drivers
into a small orbit. Gating those tom mics so that the cymbals no longer ring
through them will give you an enormous boost in cleaning up the overall mix.
Dynamics processing is the process of altering the dynamic range of a signal, thereby
enhancing the ability of a live sound system or recording device to handle the signal
without distortion or noise and aiding in placing the signal in the overall mix.
Connecting
to a
Computer
8.2.2
Types of Dynamic Processing
Compression/Limiting
Software:
Software Universal
Universal Control,
Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Punch, apparent loudness, presence—these are just three of the many
terms used to describe the effects of compression/limiting.
Compression and limiting are forms of dynamic-range (gain) control. Audio
signals have very wide peak-to-average signal-level ratios (sometimes
referred to as dynamic range, which is the difference between the loudest
level and the softest level). The peak signal can cause overload in the audiorecording or sound-reinforcement chain, resulting in signal distortion.
Tutorials
A compressor/limiter is a type of amplifier in which gain is dependent on the
signal level passing through it. You can set the maximum level a compressor/
limiter allows to pass through, thereby causing automatic gain reduction
above some predetermined signal level, or threshold. Compression refers,
basically, to the ability to reduce, by a fixed ratio, the amount by which a
signal’s output level can increase relative to the input level. It is useful for
lowering the dynamic range of an instrument or vocal, making it easier to
record without distorting the recorder. It also assists in the mixing process by
reducing the amount of level changes needed for a particular instrument.
Technical
Information
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
Take, for example, a vocalist who moves around in front of the microphone while
performing, making the output level vary up and down unnaturally. A compressor
can be applied to the signal to help correct this recording problem by reducing
the louder passages enough to be compatible with the overall performance.
134
Tutorials8
A Brief Tutorial on Dynamics Processing 8.2
How severely the compressor reduces the signal is determined by the compression
ratio and compression threshold. A ratio of 2:1 or less is considered mild
compression, reducing the output by a factor of two for signals that exceed
the compression threshold. Ratios above 10:1 are considered hard limiting.
Hookup
Overview
As the compression threshold is lowered, more of the input signal is
compressed (assuming a nominal input-signal level). Care must be taken
not to overcompress a signal, as too much compression destroys the
acoustic dynamic response of a performance. (That said, overcompression
is used by some engineers as an effect, with killer results!)
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Owner’s Manual
Limiting refers to the processing that prevents the signal from getting any louder
(that is, it prevents any increase in the signal’s amplitude) at the output.
Compressor/limiters are commonly used for many audio applications. For example:
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Controls
kick drum can get lost in a wall of electric guitars. No matter how
A
much the level is increased, the kick drum stays lost in the “mud.” A
touch of compression can tighten up that kick-drum sound, allowing
it to punch through without having to crank the level way up.
vocal performance usually has a wide dynamic range. Transients (normally
A
the loudest portions of the signal) can be far outside the average level of the
vocal signal. Because the level can change continuously and dramatically, it is
extremely difficult to ride the level with a console fader. A compressor/limiter
automatically controls gain without altering the subtleties of the performance.
solo guitar can seem to be masked by the rhythm guitars. Compression can
A
make your lead soar above the track without shoving the fader through the roof.
Compressors — Terminology
Threshold. The compressor threshold sets the level at which compression begins.
When the signal is above the threshold setting, it becomes eligible for compression.
Basically, as you turn the threshold knob counterclockwise, more of the input
signal becomes compressed (assuming you have a ratio setting greater than 1:1).
Limiter. A limiter is a compressor that is set to prevent any increase in the level of a
signal above the threshold. For example, if you have the threshold knob set at 0 dB,
and the ratio turned fully clockwise, the compressor becomes a limiter at 0 dB, so
that the output signal cannot exceed 0 dB regardless of the level of the input signal.
Technical
Information
Attack. Attack sets the speed at which the compressor acts on the
input signal. A slow attack time allows the beginning envelope of a
signal (commonly referred to as the initial transient) to pass through the
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
Tutorials
Ratio. The ratio is the relationship between the output level and the input level.
In other words, the ratio sets the compression slope. For example, if you have the
ratio set to 2:1, any signal levels above the threshold setting will be compressed
such that for every 1 dB of level increase into the compressor, the output will
only increase 0.5 dB. This produces a compression gain reduction of 0.5 dB/
dB. As you increase the ratio, the compressor gradually becomes a limiter.
Software:
Software Universal
Universal Control,
Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Connecting
to a
Computer
ass guitar can be difficult to record. A consistent level with good attack
B
can be achieved with proper compression. Your bass doesn’t have to
be washed out in the low end of the mix. Let the compressor/limiter
give your bass the punch it needs to drive the bottom of the mix.
135
8Tutorials
8.2 A Brief Tutorial on Dynamics Processing
PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
compressor unprocessed, whereas a fast attack time immediately subjects
the signal to the ratio and threshold settings of the compressor.
Overview
Release. Release sets the length of time the compressor takes to return the gain
reduction back to zero (no gain reduction) after the signal level drops below the
compression threshold. Very short release times can produce a very choppy or
“jittery” sound, especially in low-frequency instruments such as bass guitar. Very long
release times can result in an overcompressed sound; this is sometimes referred to as
“squashing” the sound. All ranges of release can be useful at different times, however,
and you should experiment to become familiar with the different sonic possibilities.
Hookup
Hard/Soft Knee. With hard-knee compression, the gain reduction applied to the
signal occurs as soon as the signal exceeds the level set by the threshold. With
soft-knee compression, the onset of gain reduction occurs gradually after the signal
has exceeded the threshold, producing a more musical response (to some folks).
Controls
Auto. Places a compressor in automatic attack and release
mode. The attack and release knobs become inoperative and
a preprogrammed attack and release curve is used.
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Makeup Gain. When compressing a signal, gain reduction usually results
in an overall reduction of level. The gain control allows you to restore
the loss in level due to compression (like readjusting the volume).
Connecting
to a
Computer
Compressor Sidechain. The sidechain jack interrupts the signal that the compressor
is using to determine the amount of gain reduction it should apply. When no
connector is inserted into this jack, the input signal goes directly to the compressor’s
control circuitry. When a connector is inserted into this jack, the signal path is broken.
The control signal can then be processed by an equalizer, for example, to reduce
sibilance (de-essing) in a vocal track. The control signal is then returned to the unit via
the connector. One common application for a sidechain is when using a compressor
to reduce the level of music or other background sound whenever a narrator speaks
or vocalist sings, allowing the voice to be clearly heard. In this application, the
vocal signal is routed to the sidechain input, while the music is routed through the
main compression circuitry. Now the compressor will automatically duck—that is,
reduce the level of—the music whenever the narrator speaks or the vocalist sings.
Software:
Software Universal
Universal Control,
Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Expansion
Tutorials
There are two basic types of expansion: dynamic and downward. Expansion increases
the dynamic range of a signal after the signal crosses the expansion threshold.
Dynamic expansion is basically the opposite of compression. In fact, broadcasters use
dynamic expansion to “undo” compression before transmitting the audio signal. This
is commonly referred to as companding’ or COMPression followed by expANDING.
Technical
Information
By far the most common use of expansion is downward expansion. In contrast
to compression, which decreases the level of a signal after it rises above the
compression threshold, expansion decreases the level of a signal after the
signal goes below the expansion threshold. The amount of level reduction is
determined by the expansion ratio. For example, a 2:1 expansion ratio reduces
the level of a signal by a factor of two. (e.g., if a level drops 5 dB below the
expansion threshold, the expander will reduce it to 10 dB below the threshold.)
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
136
Commonly used for noise reduction, expansion is very effective as a simple noise
gate. The major difference between expansion and noise gating is that expansion
is dependent on the signal level after the level crosses the threshold, whereas
a noise gate works independent of a signal’s level beyond the threshold.
Owner’s Manual
Tutorials8
A Brief Tutorial on Dynamics Processing 8.2
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Expansion— Terminology
Overview
Downward Expansion. Downward expansion is the most common
expansion used in live sound and recording. This type of expansion
reduces the level of a signal when the signal falls below a set threshold
level. This is most commonly used for noise reduction.
Hookup
Ratio. The expansion ratio sets the amount of reduction applied to a
signal once the signal has dropped below the expansion threshold. For
example, a 2:1 expansion ratio attenuates a signal 2 dB for every 1 dB it
drops below the threshold. Ratios of 4:1 and higher act much like a noise
gate but without the ability to tailor the attack, hold, and release times.
Noise Gates
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Controls
Threshold. The gate threshold sets the level at which the gate opens. Essentially,
all signals above the threshold setting are passed through unaffected, whereas
signals below the threshold setting are reduced in level by the amount set
by the range control. If the threshold is set fully counterclockwise, the gate is
turned off (always open), allowing all signals to pass through unaffected.
Attack. The gate attack time sets the rate at which the gate opens. A fast attack
rate is crucial for percussive instruments, whereas signals such as vocals and
bass guitar require a slower attack. Too fast of an attack can, on these slow-rising
signals, cause an artifact in the signal, which is heard as a click. All gates have
the ability to click when opening but a properly set gate will never click.
Connecting
to a
Computer
Hold. Hold time is used to keep the gate open for a fixed period after
the signal drops below the gate threshold. This can be very useful for
effects such as gated snare, where the gate remains open after the
snare hit for the duration of the hold time, then abruptly closes.
Software:
Software Universal
Universal Control,
Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Release. The gate-release time determines the rate at which the gate
closes. Release times should typically be set so that the natural decay of the
instrument or vocal being gated is not affected. Shorter release times help
to clean up the noise in a signal but may cause “chattering” in percussive
instruments. Longer release times usually eliminate “chattering” and should
be set by listening carefully for the most natural release of the signal.
Range. The gate range is the amount of gain reduction that the
gate produces. Therefore, if the range is set at 0 dB, there will be no
change in the signal as it crosses the threshold. If the range is set
to -60 dB, the signal will be gated (reduced) by 60 dB, etc.
Tutorials
Key Listen. The key listen allows the user to listen to
the signal that is being filtered by the gate.
Technical
Information
Frequency Key Filter. Some gates offer a variable frequency control allowing the
user to set a specific frequency band that the will cause the gate to open or close.
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
Noise Gating. Noise gating is the process of removing unwanted sounds
from a signal by attenuating all signals below a set threshold. As described,
the gate works independently of the audio signal after being “triggered” by
the signal crossing the gate threshold. The gate will remain open as long as
the signal is above the threshold. How fast the gate opens to let the “good”
signal through is determined by the attack time. How long the gate stays open
137
8Tutorials
8.2 A Brief Tutorial on Dynamics Processing
PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
after the signal has gone below the threshold is determined by the hold time.
How fast the gate closes is determined by the release. How much the gate
attenuates the unwanted signal while closed is determined by the range.
Overview
Noise gates were originally designed to help eliminate extraneous noise and
unwanted artifacts from a recording, such as hiss, rumble, or transients from other
instruments in the room. Since hiss and noise are not as loud as the instrument being
recorded, a properly set gate will only allow the intended sound to pass through;
the volume of everything else is lowered. Not only will this strip away unwanted
artifacts like hiss, it will add definition and clarity to the desired sound. This is a very
popular application for noise gates, especially with percussion instruments, as it
will add punch or “tighten” the percussive sound and make it more pronounced.
Hookup
Controls
The following are the compression presets that were used in
the PreSonus BlueMax. We have included them as a jumpingoff point for setting up compression on your StudioLive.
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Connecting
to a
Computer
Software:
Software Universal
Universal Control,
Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Tutorials
Technical
Information
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
138
Tutorials8
A Brief Tutorial on Dynamics Processing 8.2
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Compression Settings: Some Starting Points
Vocals
Soft. This is an easy compression with a low ratio setting for ballads, allowing a wider
dynamic range. It’s good for live use. This setting helps the vocal “sit in the track.”
Threshold
-8.2 dB
Ratio
1.8:1
Attack
0.002 ms
Release
38 ms
Medium. This setting has more limiting than the Soft compression setting,
producing a narrower dynamic range. It moves the vocal more up front in the mix.
Threshold
-3.3 dB
Ratio
2.8:1
Attack
0.002 ms
Release
38 ms
Attack
0.002 ms
Release
38 ms
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Ratio
3.8:1
Controls
Screamer. This setting is for loud vocals. It is a fairly hard compression setting for
a vocalist who is on and off the microphone a lot. It puts the voice “in your face.”
Threshold
-1.1 dB
Percussion
Snare/Kick. This setting allows the first transient through and compresses
the rest of the signal, giving a hard “snap” up front and a longer release.
Threshold
-2.1 dB
Ratio
3.5:1
Attack
78 ms
Release
300 ms
Attack
27 ms
Release
128 ms
Software:
Software Universal
Universal Control,
Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Ratio
1.3:1
Connecting
to a
Computer
Left/Right (Stereo) Overheads. The low ratio and threshold in this
setting gives a “fat” contour to even out the sound from overhead
drum mics. Low end is increased, and the overall sound is more
present and less ambient. You get more “boom” and less “room.”
Threshold
-13.7 dB
Fretted Instruments
Electric Bass. The fast attack and slow release in this setting will tighten
up the electric bass and give you control for a more consistent level.
Threshold
-4.4 dB
Ratio
2.6:1
Attack
45.7 ms
Release
189 ms
Attack
188 ms
Release
400 ms
Technical
Information
Ratio
3.4:1
Tutorials
Acoustic Guitar. This setting accentuates the attack of the
acoustic guitar and helps maintain an even signal level, keeping
the acoustic guitar from disappearing in the track.
Threshold
-6.3 dB
Ratio
2.4:1
Attack
26 ms
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
Electric Guitar. This is a setting for “crunch” electric rhythm
guitar. A slow attack helps to get the electric rhythm guitar “up
close and personal” and gives punch to your crunch.
Threshold
-0.1 dB
Overview
8.2.3
Hookup
Owner’s Manual
Release
193 ms
139
PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
8Tutorials
8.2 A Brief Tutorial on Dynamics Processing
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Keyboards
Piano. This is a special setting for an even level across the keyboard. It is
designed to help even up the top and bottom of an acoustic piano. In other
words, it helps the left hand to be heard along with the right hand.
Overview
Threshold
-10.8 dB
Ratio
1.9:1
Attack
108 ms
Release
112 ms
Synth. The fast attack and release on this setting can be used for
synthesizer horn stabs or for bass lines played on a synthesizer.
Hookup
Threshold
-11.9 dB
Ratio
1.8:1
Attack
0.002 ms
Release
85 ms
Controls
Orchestral. Use this setting for string pads and other types of synthesized orchestra
parts. It will decrease the overall dynamic range for easier placement in the mix.
Threshold
3.3 dB
Ratio
2.5:1
Attack
1.8 ms
Release
50 ms
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Stereo Mix
Stereo Limiter. Just as the name implies, this is a hard limiter, or “brick wall,”
setting—ideal for controlling the level to a two-track mixdown deck or stereo output.
Threshold
5.5 dB
Ratio
7.1:1
Connecting
to a
Computer
Attack
0.001 ms
Release
98 ms
Attack
0.002 ms
Release
182 ms
Contour. This setting fattens up the main mix.
Threshold
-13.4 dB
Ratio
1.2:1
Effects
Software:
Software Universal
Universal Control,
Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Squeeze. This is dynamic compression for solo work, especially electric
guitar. It gives you that glassy “Tele/Strat” sound. It is a true classic.
Threshold
-4.6 dB
Ratio
2.4:1
Attack
7.2 ms
Release
93 ms
Pump. This is a setting for making the compressor “pump” in a desirable
way. This effect is good for snare drums to increase the length of
the transient by bringing the signal up after the initial spike.
Tutorials
Threshold
0 dB
Technical
Information
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
140
Ratio
1.9:1
Attack
1 ms
Release
0.001 ms
The StudioLive 16.0.2 is equipped with a 3-band semi-parametric equalizer on every
input and output bus. Here’s a brief explanation of how an EQ functions, as well as
some charts to help you navigate the frequency ranges of various instruments so
you can quickly choose the best EQ settings for your recordings and live mixes.
What is an EQ?
Controls
Hookup
An equalizer is a filter that allows you to adjust the level of a frequency,
or range of frequencies, of an audio signal. In its simplest form, an EQ will
let you turn the treble and bass up or down, allowing you to adjust the
coloration of, let’s say, your car stereo or iPod. In recording, equalization
is a sophisticated art. Good equalization is critical to a good mix.
When used correctly, an equalizer can provide the impression of nearness
or distance, “fatten” or “thin” a sound, and help blend or provide separation
between similar sounds in a mix allowing them to both shine through the mix.
Parametric EQ
The parametric EQ and semi-parametric EQ are the most common equalizers
found in recording and live situations because they offer continuous control
over all parameters. A parametric EQ offers continuous control over the audio
signal’s frequency content, which is divided into several bands of frequencies
(most commonly three to seven bands). A fully parametric EQ like those in the
StudioLive 24.4.2 offers control over the bandwidth (basically, the range of
frequencies affected), the center frequency of the band, and the level (boost/
cut) of the designated frequency band. It also offers separate control over the Q,
which is the ratio of the center frequency to the bandwidth. A semi-parametric EQ
provides control over most of these parameters but the Q is fixed. Some devices,
such as the StudioLive 16.4.2 & 16.0.2, have quasi-parametric EQ, which is semiparametric EQ with a simple, switchable Q setting (typically, High and Low Q).
Q
Tutorials
Q is the ratio of center frequency to bandwidth, and if the center frequency
is fixed, then bandwidth is inversely proportional to Q—meaning that as
you raise the Q, you narrow the bandwidth. In fully parametric EQs, you have
continuous bandwidth control and/or continuous Q control, which allows
you to attenuate or boost a very narrow or wide range of frequencies.
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
8.3.1
Overview
Equalizers
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Tutorials8
Equalizers8.3
Connecting
to a
Computer
8.3
Software:
Software Universal
Universal Control,
Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Owner’s Manual
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
Technical
Information
A narrow bandwidth (higher Q) has obvious benefits for removing unpleasant
tones. Let’s say the snare drum in your mix has an annoying ring to it. With a
very narrow bandwidth, you can isolate this one frequency (usually around
1 kHz) and remove, or reject, it. This type of narrow band-reject filter is also
known as a notch filter. By notching out the offending frequency, you can
remove the problem without removing the instrument from the mix. A narrow
bandwidth is also useful in boosting pleasant tones of an instrument such as
the attack. Take for instance, a kick drum. A kick drum resonates somewhere
between 60 to 125 Hz, but the attack of the kick drum is much higher at 2 to
5 kHz. By setting a narrow bandwidth and boosting the attack a bit, you can
achieve a punchier kick drum without overpowering the rest of the mix.
141
8Tutorials
8.3Equalizers
PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
A broad bandwidth accentuates or attenuates a larger band of frequencies. The
broad and narrow bandwidths (high and low Q) are usually used in conjunction
with one another to achieve the desired effect. Let’s look at our kick drum again.
We have a kick drum that has a great, big, low-end sound centered around 100
Hz and an attack hitting almost dead-on at 4 kHz. In this example, you would
use a broad bandwidth in the low frequency band, centered at 100 Hz, and a
narrow bandwidth boosted at 4 kHz. In this way you are accentuating the best
and downplaying everything else this particular kick drum has to offer.
Overview
Hookup
Shelving EQ
A shelving EQ attenuates or boost frequencies above or below a specified cutoff
frequency. Shelving equalizers come in two different varieties: high and low.
Controls
In practice, you can think of these types of EQs like the treble and bass
controls on your car stereo. Just like the bass control, a low-shelf filter will raise
or lower the gain on all frequencies below the specified cutoff frequency.
A high-shelf filter will do the opposite and raise or lower the gain on all
frequencies above the specified cut-off frequency, just like the treble control.
In this way, Shelving EQs can be used to make big changes to the sound very
quickly by adding or removing an entire range of frequencies at once.
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Graphic EQ
Connecting
to a
Computer
The StudioLive 16.0.2 features a stereo 31-band, graphic EQs that can be inserted
on the main bus. (See Section 5.3 for details.) A graphic EQ is a multiband
equalizer that uses sliders to adjust the amplitude for each frequency band. It
gets its name from the positions of the sliders, which graphically display the
resulting frequency-response curve. As explained in Section 5.3, the encoders
in the Fat Channel are used to make amplitude adjustments, and the meter
LEDs display the “slider” positions. The center frequency and bandwidth are
fixed; the level (amplitude) for each band is the only adjustable parameter.
Software:
Software Universal
Universal Control,
Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Graphic EQs are generally used to fine-tune the overall mix for a particular
room. For instance, if you are mixing in a “dead” room, you may want to boost
high frequencies and roll off some of the lows. If you are mixing in a “live”
room, you might need to lower the high-midrange and highest frequencies. In
general, you should not make drastic amplitude adjustments to any particular
frequency bands. Instead, make smaller, incremental adjustments over a wider
spectrum to round out your final mix. To assist you with these adjustments, here
is an overview of which frequencies affect different sound characteristics:
Tutorials
Sub-Bass (16 Hz to 60 Hz). The lowest of these bass frequencies are felt, rather
than heard, as with freeway rumbling or an earthquake. These frequencies give
your mix a sense of power even when they only occur occasionally. However,
overemphasizing frequencies in this range will result in a muddy mix.
Technical
Information
Bass (60 Hz to 250 Hz). Because this range contains the fundamental notes
of the rhythm section, any EQ changes will affect the balance of your mix,
making it fat or thin. Too much emphasis will make for a boomy mix.
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
142
Tutorials8
Equalizers8.3
Overview
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Low Mids (250 Hz to 2 kHz). In general, you will want to emphasize the lower
portion of this range and de-emphasize the upper portion. Boosting the range
from 250 Hz to 500 Hz will accent ambience in the studio and will add clarity to
bass and lower frequency instruments. The range between 500 Hz and 2 kHz
can make midrange instruments (guitar, snare, saxophone, etc.) “honky,” and too
much boost between 1 kHz and 2 kHz can make your mix sound thin or “tinny.”
Hookup
High Mids (2 kHz to 4 kHz). The attack portion of percussive
and rhythm instruments occurs in this range. High mids are also
responsible for the projection of midrange instruments.
Brilliance (6 kHz to 16 kHz). While this range controls the
brilliance and clarity of your mix, boosting it too much can cause
some clipping so keep an eye on your main meter.
8.3.2
Equalization Settings: How to Find the Best and Leave the Rest
How do you find the best and worst each instrument has to offer and
adjust their frequency content accordingly? Here’s a quick guide:
••
First, solo just the instrument with which you are working. Most engineers start
building their mix with the drums and work from the bottom up (kick, snare,
toms, hi-hat, overheads). Each instrument resonates primarily in a specific
frequency band, so if you are working on your kick-drum mic, start with the
lowest band of the EQ. Tune in the best-sounding low end and move on to the
attack. It is not uncommon to hear an annoying ringing or a “twang” mixed
in with your amazing-sounding low end and perfect attack, so your next
task will be to find that offending frequency and notch it out. Once you are
satisfied with your kick drum, mute it, and move on to the next instrument.
••
Taking your time with equalization is well worth the effort.
Your mix will have better separation and more clarity.
••
You can only do so much. Not every instrument can or should
have a full, rich low end and a sharp attack. If every instrument is
EQ’d to have the same effect, it will lose its identity in the mix. Your
goal is not individual perfection, it is perfection in unity.
••
Step away from the mix. Your ears get fatigued, just like the rest
of you. If you are working particularly hard on one instrument, your
ears will be quite literally numbed to that frequency range.
••
Your memory is not what you think it is. Comparing a flat EQ and the
curve that you’ve created allows you to see and hear exactly what you’ve
done. So be honest with yourself. Sometimes that EQ setting you’ve
been working on for 15 minutes is not the right choice, so move on.
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
Technical
Information
Tutorials
Additional advice:
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Controls
Presence (4 kHz to 6 kHz). This frequency range is partly responsible
for the clarity of a mix and provides a measure of control over the
perception of distance. If you boost this frequency range, the mix will
be perceived as closer to the listener. Attenuating around 5 kHz will
make the mix sound further away but also more transparent.
Connecting
to a
Computer
Software:
Software Universal
Universal Control,
Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Owner’s Manual
143
PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
8Tutorials
8.3Equalizers
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
••
Overview
Never be afraid of taking a risk. The best EQ tricks were found by mad scientists
of sound. With every instrument, there are frequencies that can be attenuated or
boosted to add clarity or fullness. Altering the wrong frequencies can make an
instrument shrill, muddy, or just downright annoying. The following two charts
suggest frequency ranges that should be accentuated or downplayed for the
most common instruments. These are just suggestions; the frequencies may need
to be adjusted up or down depending on the instrument, room, and microphone.
Table 1
Hookup
Instrument
Human Voice
Controls
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Piano
Electric Guitar
Acoustic Guitar
Electric Bass
Connecting
to a
Computer
String Bass
Snare Drum
Software:
Software Universal
Universal Control,
Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Kick Drum
Toms
Cymbals
Tutorials
Horns
Technical
Information
String section
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
144
What to Cut
Why to Cut
What to Boost
Why to Boost
7 kHz
Sibilance
8 kHz
Big sound
2 kHz
Shrill
3 kHz and above
Clarity
1 kHz
Nasal
200-400 Hz
Body
80 Hz and below
Popping P’s
1-2 kHz
Tinny
5 kHz
More presence
300 Hz
Boomy
100 Hz
Bottom end
1-2 kHz
Shrill
3 kHz
Clarity
80 Hz and below
Muddy
125 Hz
Bottom end
2-3 kHz
Tinny
5 kHz and above
Sparkle
200 Hz
Boomy
125 Hz
Full
1 kHz
Thin
600 Hz
Growl
125 Hz
Boomy
80 Hz and below
Bottom end
600 Hz
Hollow
2-5 kHz
Sharp attack
200 Hz
Boomy
125 Hz and below
Bottom end
1 kHz
Annoying
2 kHz
Crisp
150-200 Hz
Full
80 Hz
Deep
400 Hz
Muddy
2-5 kHz
Sharp attack
80 Hz and below
Boomy
60-125 Hz
Bottom end
300 Hz
Boomy
2-5 kHz
Sharp attack
80-200 Hz
Bottom end
7-8 kHz
Sizzle
8-12 kHz
Brilliance
15 kHz
Air
1 kHz
Annoying
1 kHz
Honky
8-12 kHz
Big sound
120 Hz and below
Muddy
2 kHz
Clarity
3 kHz
Shrill
2 kHz
Clarity
120 Hz and below
Muddy
400-600 Hz
Lush and full
Technical
Information
Tutorials
Software:
Software Universal
Universal Control,
Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Connecting
to a
Computer
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Controls
Hookup
Overview
Table 2
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
Owner’s Manual
Tutorials8
Equalizers8.3
145
PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
8Tutorials
8.3Equalizers
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
8.3.3
General EQ Suggestions
Overview
Included with your StudioLive is a library of Channel Strip presets. Section
4.1.6 discusses how to load these presets onto a channel or bus and how
to create your own presets. For an idea of where to start, check out the
following generic EQ settings for several different instruments. As with the
compression settings in Section 8.2.3, the right EQ setting for any given
instrument will depend upon the room and the tonality of the instrument.
Hookup
Vocals
Pop Female Vocals
Controls
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
LOW
ON/OFF
ON
LOW
PEAK/SHELF
PEAK
LOW
FREQ (Hz)
130
LOW
GAIN
-2
LOW MID
ON/OFF
ON
LOW MID
HI/LOW Q
LOW
LOW MID
FREQ (Hz)
465
LOW MID
GAIN
-2
HI MID
ON/OFF
ON
HI MID
LO/HI
LO
HI MID
FREQ (kHz)
2.4
HI MID
GAIN
+2
HI
ON/OFF
ON
HI
PEAK/SHELF
PEAK
HI
FREQ (kHz)
6.0
HI
GAIN
+8
Rock Female Vocals
Connecting
to a
Computer
LOW
ON/OFF
ON
LOW
PEAK/SHELF
SHELF
LOW
FREQ (Hz)
155
LOW
GAIN
+4
LOW MID
ON/OFF
ON
LOW MID
HI/LOW Q
LOW
LOW MID
FREQ (Hz)
465
LOW MID
GAIN
+6
HI MID
ON/OFF
ON
HI MID
LO/HI
LO
HI MID
FREQ (kHz)
1.4
HI MID
GAIN
+6
HI
ON/OFF
ON
HI
PEAK/SHELF
PEAK
HI
FREQ (kHz)
4.2
HI
GAIN
+2
Pop Male Vocals
Software:
Software Universal
Universal Control,
Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
LOW
ON/OFF
ON
LOW
PEAK/SHELF
PEAK
LOW
FREQ (Hz)
225
LOW
GAIN
-2
LOW MID
ON/OFF
ON
LOW MID
HI/LOW Q
HI
LOW MID
FREQ (Hz)
960
LOW MID
GAIN
0
HI MID
ON/OFF
ON
HI MID
LO/HI
LO
HI MID
FREQ (kHz)
2.0
HI MID
GAIN
+2
HI
ON/OFF
ON
HI
PEAK/SHELF
PEAK
HI
FREQ (kHz)
7.2
HI
GAIN
+4
Rock Male Vocals
Tutorials
Technical
Information
LOW
ON/OFF
ON
LOW
PEAK/SHELF
PEAK
LOW
FREQ (Hz)
155
LOW
GAIN
+2
LOW MID
ON/OFF
ON
LOW MID
HI/LOW Q
HI
LOW MID
FREQ (Hz)
265
LOW MID
GAIN
-6
HI MID
ON/OFF
ON
HI MID
LO/HI
HI
HI MID
FREQ (kHz)
2.4
HI MID
GAIN
-2
HI
ON/OFF
ON
HI
PEAK/SHELF
SHELF
HI
FREQ (kHz)
7.2
HI
GAIN
+4
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
146
Owner’s Manual
Tutorials8
Equalizers8.3
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Percussion
LOW
PEAK/SHELF
PEAK
LOW
FREQ (Hz)
130
LOW
GAIN
-4
LOW MID
ON/OFF
ON
LOW MID
HI/LOW Q
LOW
LOW MID
FREQ (Hz)
665
LOW MID
GAIN
+4
HI MID
ON/OFF
ON
HI MID
LO/HI
LO
HI MID
FREQ (kHz)
1.6
HI MID
GAIN
+4
HI
ON/OFF
ON
HI
PEAK/SHELF
SHELF
HI
FREQ (kHz)
4.2
HI
GAIN
+4
Hookup
LOW
ON/OFF
ON
Overview
Snare
LOW
PEAK/SHELF
SHELF
LOW
FREQ (Hz)
108
LOW
GAIN
-2
LOW MID
ON/OFF
ON
LOW MID
HI/LOW Q
LOW
LOW MID
FREQ (Hz)
385
LOW MID
GAIN
-2
HI MID
ON/OFF
ON
HI MID
LO/HI
LO
HI MID
FREQ (kHz)
2.9
HI MID
GAIN
+2
HI
ON/OFF
ON
HI
PEAK/SHELF
SHELF
HI
FREQ (kHz)
8
HI
GAIN
4
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
LOW
ON/OFF
ON
Controls
Left/Right (Stereo) Overheads
LOW
ON/OFF
ON
LOW
PEAK/SHELF
PEAK
LOW
FREQ (Hz)
108
LOW
GAIN
+4
LOW MID
ON/OFF
ON
LOW MID
HI/LOW Q
HI
LOW MID
FREQ (Hz)
265
LOW MID
GAIN
-4
HI MID
ON/OFF
ON
HI MID
LO/HI
LO
HI MID
FREQ (kHz)
1.6
HI MID
GAIN
0
HI
ON/OFF
ON
HI
PEAK/SHELF
SHELF
HI
FREQ (kHz)
6.0
HI
GAIN
+4
Connecting
to a
Computer
Kick Drum
Software:
Software Universal
Universal Control,
Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Fretted Instruments
LOW
ON/OFF
ON
LOW
PEAK/SHELF
SHELF
LOW
FREQ (Hz)
36
LOW
GAIN
-8
LOW MID
ON/OFF
ON
LOW MID
HI/LOW Q
HI
LOW MID
FREQ (Hz)
130
LOW MID
GAIN
+4
HI MID
ON/OFF
ON
HI MID
LO/HI
LO
HI MID
FREQ (kHz)
2.0
HI MID
GAIN
+4
HI
ON/OFF
ON
HI
PEAK/SHELF
SHELF
HI
FREQ (kHz)
4.2
HI
GAIN
0
Tutorials
Electric Bass
LOW
PEAK/SHELF
PEAK
LOW
FREQ (Hz)
155
LOW
GAIN
+4
LOW MID
ON/OFF
ON
LOW MID
HI/LOW Q
LOW
LOW MID
FREQ (Hz)
665
LOW MID
GAIN
+2
HI MID
ON/OFF
ON
HI MID
LO/HI
LO
HI MID
FREQ (kHz)
2.0
HI MID
GAIN
0
HI
ON/OFF
ON
HI
PEAK/SHELF
SHELF
HI
FREQ (kHz)
6.0
HI
GAIN
+4
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
LOW
ON/OFF
ON
Technical
Information
Acoustic Guitar
147
PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
8Tutorials
8.3Equalizers
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Distorted Electric Guitar
Overview
LOW
ON/OFF
ON
LOW
PEAK/SHELF
PEAK
LOW
FREQ (Hz)
320
LOW
GAIN
+6
LOW MID
ON/OFF
ON
LOW MID
HI/LOW Q
LOW
LOW MID
FREQ (Hz)
960
LOW MID
GAIN
0
HI MID
ON/OFF
ON
HI MID
LO/HI
HI
HI MID
FREQ (kHz)
3.5
HI MID
GAIN
+4
HI
ON/OFF
ON
HI
PEAK/SHELF
SHELF
HI
FREQ (kHz)
12
HI
GAIN
0
Hookup
Keyboards
Piano
Controls
LOW
ON/OFF
ON
LOW
PEAK/SHELF
SHELF
LOW
FREQ (Hz)
108
LOW
GAIN
-2
LOW MID
ON/OFF
ON
LOW MID
HI/LOW Q
LO
LOW MID
FREQ (Hz)
665
LOW MID
GAIN
+2
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
HI MID
ON/OFF
ON
HI MID
LO/HI
LO
HI MID
FREQ (kHz)
2.9
HI MID
GAIN
+2
HI
ON/OFF
ON
HI
PEAK/SHELF
PEAK
HI
FREQ (kHz)
7.2
HI
GAIN
+4
Connecting
to a
Computer
Software:
Software Universal
Universal Control,
Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Tutorials
Technical
Information
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
148
8.4.1
Hookup
The Aux bus provides outputs to create auxiliary mixes that are separate from
the main and subgroup mixes. The StudioLive is equipped with 6 aux buses:
Aux 1 through 4, which have physical output jacks, and EFX A and B, which are
the internal effects buses. Aux buses can be used for many applications, the
two most common of which are creating monitor mixes and inserting external
effects processors into the mix. The StudioLive allows you to add global dynamics
processing and EQ to these aux buses, in addition to individual channel processing.
Monitor Mixing
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Controls
Creating custom monitor mixes for your musicians is critical. If musicians
can’t hear themselves or their bandmates, their performance will suffer. A
monitor mix can be mono or stereo. Most often, an individual live monitor
mix is mono and is sent to a floor-wedge or sidefill monitor. (The obvious
exception is in-ear monitor systems.) A studio monitor mix is usually stereo
and is sent to a headphone amplifier, so it requires both a left- and a rightchannel input. In both cases, the function of the aux bus is the same.
Connecting
to a
Computer
1. As an example, let’s create a mono monitor mix on Aux 1. To begin, press
the Aux 1 button in the Encoder Mode section. The meter section of the
StudioLive will display the amount of send to this aux bus from each of the
16 channels. Keep in mind that the aux mix is completely independent of
the Main output. The encoders below each meter control the channel send
level to Aux 1. Use these encoders the same way that you use the faders
to set the output level to your main mix. Ask your musicians what they
would like in their monitor mix and use their requests as a starting point.
Software:
Software Universal
Universal Control,
Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
2. By pressing the Select button for Aux 1, you can add dynamics processing
and EQ to the overall monitor mix. These are especially useful for eliminating
feedback in a monitor. Keep in mind that an equalizer can also be used to
increase the presence of an instrument by boosting that particular frequency
range without necessarily boosting the volume in the mix. This is great for
getting the lead guitar to cut through in the guitarist’s monitor mix and to
provide that extra rumble in the bassist’s mix. You can listen to the aux mixes
you are creating, using your headphones or your control-room monitor, by
simply soloing the aux and selecting Solo as the source in the Monitor section.
Effects Processing
The StudioLive features two internal effects buses. These are
used much in the same way the aux buses are used to create
monitor mixes, as described in the previous section.
Tutorials
8.4.2
Overview
Aux Bus Mixing
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Tutorials8
Aux Bus Mixing 8.4
There are several advantages to using an aux bus for an effects processor. This section
will describe two of them. By using an aux bus to create an effects mix, several
channels can be sent to a single processor. This allows you to use exactly the same
reverb on every drum in a kit or for the entire band. A reverb is designed to emulate
the psycho-acoustic properties of a space. By using the same reverb for a band, you
are putting the band “in the same room.” This makes for a more cohesive sound.
In addition, by using an aux mix, you can vary the level sent from each channel to
the processor, allowing you to create an effects mix. Let’s say that you are using a
149
Technical
Information
8.4
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
Owner’s Manual
8Tutorials
8.4 Aux Bus Mixing
PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
reverb to liven up a relatively dead room. You might send a little bit of each input
to the reverb, but you probably will not want much of the drums and bass to be
processed, as too much reverb could reduce their impact and leave your mix without
a sturdy foundation. So rather than turning the aux-send level for the kick drum
channel all the way up, turn it so that the meter reads between 20-30% saturation.
This way only a small portion of the kick drum input will be affected by the reverb.
Overview
Hookup
Once you have determined your effects mix, you can press the Select button
for the effect bus (FXA or FXB) to add Fat Channel dynamics processing
and EQ to the reverb-enhanced signal. The knobs for FXA and FXB controls
the level of the aux mix relative to the level of your main mix.
Controls
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Connecting
to a
Computer
Software:
Software Universal
Universal Control,
Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Tutorials
Technical
Information
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
150
Tutorials8
Digital Effects 8.5
The reason for the widespread use of reverb in audio recording is fairly self-evident:
human beings don’t live in a vacuum. Because our brains receive cues about the
nature of the space around us based partially on audio reflections, a sense of space
makes an audio recording sound more natural and, therefore, more pleasing.
The following parameters can usually be adjusted in a reverb effect:
ecay. Decay is the time required for the reflections (reverberation) to die away.
D
In most modern music production, reverb decay times of between one and
three seconds are prevalent. A reverb setting with strong early reflections and
a quick decay are a great way to create a stereo effect from a mono source.
••
redelay. Predelay is the time between the end of the initial sound and the
P
moment when the first reflections become audible. Imagine you’re back on that
stage in a large music hall. This time you stand on the very edge of the stage
and shout “Hello world!” toward the center of the hall. There will be a brief pause
before you hear the first noticeable reflections of your voice, because the sound
waves can travel much further before encountering a surface and bouncing
back. (There are closer surfaces, of course—notably the floor and the ceiling just
in front of the stage—but only a small part of the direct sound will go there, so
those reflections will be much less noticeable.) Adjusting the predelay parameter
on a reverb allows you to change the apparent size of the room without
having to change the overall decay time. This will give your mix a little more
transparency by leaving some space between the original sound and its reverb.
••
F and LF decay. The types of surfaces in a space also affect the sound.
H
Carpet and soft furnishings will absorb more high-frequency waves,
thereby reducing the high-frequency decay time, while hard surfaces
such as tile or stone reflect sound extremely well, resulting in a “brighter”
ambience. Similarly, the high-frequency (HF) and low-frequency (LF)
decay time allow you to adjust the “brightness” or “darkness” of the
reverb, enabling you to better emulate these environmental factors.
Technical
Information
Tutorials
••
Hookup
Reverberation­—or reverb, as it is more commonly known—is perhaps the most
widely used effect. Natural reverb is created by sound waves reflecting off of a surface
or many surfaces. For example, when you walk across the wooden stage in a large
hall, thousands of reflections are generated almost instantaneously as the sound
waves bounce off the floor, walls, and ceilings. These are known as early reflections,
and their pattern provides psycho-acoustic indications as to the nature of the space
that you are in, even if you can’t see it. As each reflection is then reflected off of more
surfaces, the complexity of the sound increases, while the reverb slowly decays.
Controls
Reverb
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
8.5.1
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
The StudioLive includes two stereo effects processors that feature the two
most common type of effects is use for live sound: reverb and delay.
Overview
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Digital Effects
Connecting
to a
Computer
8.5
Software:
Software Universal
Universal Control,
Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Owner’s Manual
151
8Tutorials
8.5 Digital Effect
PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
8.5.2Delay
A delay essentially creates an echo, although you can often use
delays to create more complex time-based effects. The source signal
is delayed so that it is heard later than it actually occurred.
Overview
Hookup
elay Time. Delay time is the time between the source signal and its
D
echo. The simplest delay effect is a single repeat. A short delay between
30 and 100 ms can be used to create slap-back echo, while longer delay
times produce a more distant echo. Delay times that are too short to
hear as distinct echoes can be used to create thickening effects. Whether
these echoes are timed with the tempo is a matter of stylistic choice.
Controls
ariable Feedback. Variable feedback, or regeneration, produces multiple
V
decaying repeats. Increasing the feedback value increases the number of echoes
as well as the resonance that is created as one echo disappears into another.
ote: Using the Tap button on the StudioLive, you can speed up or slow down these
N
repeats or, more commonly, time the repeats to occur with the tempo of the music.
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Connecting
to a
Computer
Software:
Software Universal
Universal Control,
Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Tutorials
Technical
Information
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
152
Owner’s Manual
Tutorials8
Level Setting Procedure in Detail 8.6
Level Setting Procedure in Detail
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
8.6
Setting the proper levels is an important part of getting the right sound.
The following steps will assist you in quickly setting your levels.
Overview
1. Turn each of the 12 trims to 0/-20.
Controls
Hookup
2. Press the Input button in the Meter section.
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
3. In the Solo bus section, select PFL and turn the Cue level to 12 o’clock.
5. Solo your first channel and turn the trim to the desired level on the meter. Be careful
not to get the signal above 0 dBFS. You do not want to clip the analog-to-digital
converters!
When all else fails, remember: button, button, knob, button, knob, button, knob.
Technical
Information
The StudioLive features an independent Solo bus. This feature is extremely
useful in setting levels for monitor mixes, dialing in dynamics processing on each
channel, and fixing issues during a live show without interrupting the main mix.
Tutorials
The Solo Bus
The Solo bus has three different modes: AFL (default), PFL, and SIP.
AFL (After-Fade Listen). AFL sends the channel or subgroup signal to
the Solo bus post-fader so that you can control the level of the soloed
signal with the fader. This is the StudioLive’s default setting.
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
8.7
Software:
Software Universal
Universal Control,
Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Connecting
to a
Computer
4. Select the Solo button in the Monitor section and adjust the volume for your
headphones or control-room monitors.
FL (Pre-Fade Listen). PFL sends the channel or subgroup signal to the Solo
P
bus before it reaches the fader, so the fader does not affect the soloed signal.
153
8Tutorials
8.7 The Solo Bus
™
PreSonus StudioLive
16.0.2
Tutorials8
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
IP (Solo In Place). This is also known as destructive solo. When channels are
S
soloed in this mode, every channel that isn’t soloed will be muted, and only
the soloed channels will be sent to their assigned outputs. While useful in
dialing in dynamics during soundcheck, this mode is dangerous during a live
show. We recommend that this mode be turned off when mixing live events.
Overview
8.7.1
Using the Solo Bus for Monitoring
Hookup
When mixing live, or when recording multiple musicians at once, it is often
necessary to quickly listen in on just one instrument or group. The Solo
and Monitor buses can be used together for this purpose. It is important to
note that if you wish to monitor with speakers, rather than headphones, it
is necessary to connect the speakers to the Control Room outputs on the
back of your StudioLive rather than to one of the main output pairs.
Controls
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
First decide whether you want to listen to your soloed channels before or after
the fader setting. If you’d like to monitor before the fader level, press the PFL
button in your Solo bus section. Next, press the Solo buttons on the channels
or auxes you want to monitor. Turn the Cue knob in the Solo section to about
12 o’clock. Finally, select the Solo button in your monitor bus and dial in a
comfortable listening volume for you headphones or monitors. You can increase
the overall volume of the Solo bus using the Cue knob in the Solo section.
Connecting
to a
Computer
This feature can also be used to listen in on a monitor mix that is being routed to an
aux send. Let’s say your vocalist on stage is complaining that there is too much bass
in his monitor, but you are confident that no bass is being sent to that particular
aux send. You could be mistaken, but most likely an open microphone on stage
is picking up the bass signal. To determine the cause, solo only the aux send in
question and, again, select the Solo button for the monitors/headphones. You can
now listen to exactly the same mix as your troubled vocalist and fix his monitor
mix quickly. This application is also useful in heading off a feedback problem.
Software:
Software Universal
Universal Control,
Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
8.7.2
Destructive Soloing
Destructive Soloing or Solo in Place (SIP) is a great way to tune each channel’s
dynamics individually in live mix situations or do some surgical editing in the
studio. SIP mode mutes every Channel and Bus that is not soloed in the main
bus (that is, if Channel 3 is soloed, you will only hear Channel 3 in your Mains).
This makes a great fine tuning tool but it can quickly destroy a live mix. We
highly recommend that you drop out of this mode once the show has started.
Tutorials
8.7.3
Using Solo in Place (SIP) to Set Up a Mix
Technical
Information
In Section 8.7, we discussed a quick and easy way to set up the input levels for your
StudioLive, ensuring that you have the highest possible input level without clipping
your analog-to-digital converters. The next step is to set up your mix by dialing in
the dynamics, EQ, and fader settings for each channel. Enter Solo In Place (SIP).
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
154
2. Press and hold the SIP button in the Cue section until it illuminates and press
the Solo button on your kick-drum mic channel. Notice that all the other
channels on your StudioLive have been muted.
3. Bring up the fader on the kick-drum channel and press the channel’s Select
button. The Fat Channel will display the dynamics processing, EQ, output
routing, and pan settings for the kick drum.
Controls
4. Using the encoders and meters in the Fat Channel, set
up the compressor and EQ for this channel.
Overview
1. To begin, bring all your faders down and raise your main fader to unity gain.
Hookup
As discussed earlier in Section 8.7, most engineers start
with the drums and work from the bottom up.
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Tutorials8
The Solo Bus 8.7
5. Once you are satisfied, press the Solo button again.
Technical
Information
Tutorials
Software:
Software Universal
Universal Control,
Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Connecting
to a
Computer
6. Next, press the Solo button on the snare-mic channel and repeat this
procedure. In this way continue with each drum mic and then move on to the
other instruments that are connected to your StudioLive. When you have
finished with all the instruments, press the SIP button again and slowly bring
up your main fader to set up your mix.
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
Owner’s Manual
155
PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
9
Technical Information
9.1Specifications
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
9.0 Technical Information
9.1
Specifications
Overview
Microphone Preamp
Hookup
Controls
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Frequency Response to Direct Output (at unity gain)
20 Hz-40 kHz, 0 / -0.5 dBu
Frequency Response to Main Output (at unity gain)
20 Hz-20 kHz, ± 0.5 dBu
Input Impedance
1 kΩ
THD to Direct Output (1 kHz at unity gain)
< 0.005%, +4 dBu, 20 Hz–20 kHz, unity gain, unwtd
THD to Main Output (1 kHz at unity gain)
<0.005%, +4 dBu, 20 Hz-20 kHz, unity gain, unwtd
EIN to Direct Output
+125 dB unwtd, +130 dB A-wtd
S/N Ratio to Direct Output (Ref = +4 dB, 20 kHz BW, unity gain, A-wtd)
-97 dB
S/N Ratio to Main Output (Ref = +4 dB, 20 kHz BW, unity gain, A-wtd)
-94 dB
Common Mode Rejection Ratio (1 kHz at unity gain)
+65 dB
Gain Control Range (± 1 dB)
-16 dB to +67 dB
Maximum Input Level (unity gain)
+16 dBu
+48 VDC
Type
1/4” TRS Female, balanced mono
Frequency Response to Direct Outputs (at unity gain)
10 Hz-40 kHz, 0 / -0.5 dBu
Frequency Response to Main Outputs (at unity gain)
20 Hz-20 kHz, 0/-0.5 dBu
Input Impedance
10 kΩ
THD to Direct Output (1 kHz at unity gain)
<0.0007%, +4 dBu, 20 Hz-20 kHz, unity gain, unwtd
THD to Main Output (1 kHz at unity gain)
<0.005%, +4 dBu, 20 Hz-20 kHz, unity gain, unwtd
S/N Ratio to Direct Output (Ref = +4 dBu, 20 kHz BW, unity gain, A-wtd)
-105 dB
S/N Ratio to Main Output (Ref = +4 dBu, 20 kHz BW, unity gain, A-wtd)
-94 dB
Gain Control Range (± 1 dB)
-20 dB to +20 dB
Maximum Input level (unity gain)
+22 dBu
Tutorials
Phantom Power (± 2 VDC)
Software:
Software Universal
Universal Control,
Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
XLR Female, balanced
Connecting
to a
Computer
Type
Line Inputs, Balanced
Technical
Information
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
156
Owner’s Manual
Technical Information
9
Specifications9.1
RCA Female, unbalanced (stereo pair)
Maximum Input Level
+12 dBu
Overview
Type
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Line Inputs, Unbalanced
Main Outputs
XLR Male, balanced (stereo pair); 1/4” TRS Female, balanced (stereo pair);
XLR Male, balanced (mono)
Rated Output Level
+24 dBu
Output Impedance
100Ω
Hookup
Type
1/4” TRS Female, balanced (mono)
Rated Output Level
+18 dBu
Output Impedance
51Ω
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Type
Controls
Aux Outputs
Type
1/4” TRS Female, balanced (stereo pair)
Rated Output Level
+18 dBu
Output Impedance
51Ω
Connecting
to a
Computer
Monitor Outputs
-87 dBu
Tutorials
Adjacent Channels (Ref = +4 dBu, 20 Hz-20 kHz, unwtd)
Technical
Information
-90 dBu
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
Input to Output (Ref = +4 dBu, 20 Hz-20 kHz, unwtd)
Software:
Software Universal
Universal Control,
Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
System Crosstalk
157
PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
9
Technical Information
9.1Specifications
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Noise Gate (Expander)
Overview
Threshold Range
-84 dB to 0 dB
Attack Time
Adaptive (0.2 - 2.5 ms)
Release Time
70 ms
Expander Attenuation Range
2:1
Hookup
Compressor
Controls
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Threshold Range
-56 dB to 0 dB
Ratio
1:1 to 14:1
Response Time (Attack/Release)
0.2 ms / 1.0 s (“Tight”) to 180 ms/1.0 s (“Smooth”)
Auto Attack and Release
Attack = 10 ms, Release = 150 ms
Curve Types
hard and soft knee
EQ
Connecting
to a
Computer
Type
2nd - order shelving filter (Q = 0.55)
Low (Low-pass or Bandpass)
36 to 465 Hz, ± 15 dB
Mid
260 Hz to 3.5 kHz, ±15 dB
High (High-pass or Bandpass)
1.4 kHz to 18 kHz, ±15 dB
Digital Audio
Software:
Software Universal
Universal Control,
Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Tutorials
ADC Dynamic Range (A-wtd, 48 kHz)
118 dB
DAC Dynamic Range (A-wtd, 48 kHz)
118 dB
FireWire
S400, 400 Mb/s
Internal Processing
32-bit, floating point
Sampling Rate
44.1, 48 kHz
A/D/A Bit Depth
24 bits
Reference Level for 0 dBFS
-18 dBu
Technical
Information
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
158
Owner’s Manual
Technical Information
9
Specifications9.1
<20 ps RMS (20 Hz - 20 kHz)
Jitter Attenuation
>60 dB (1 ns in ≈ 1 ps out)
Overview
Jitter
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Clock
Power
Input-Voltage Range
90 to 240 VAC (factory-configured for country of destination)
Power Requirements (continuous)
100W
Hookup
ConnectorIEC
Weight
15 Lbs. (6.8 kg)
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
15.25 inches (133.4 mm)
Connecting
to a
Computer
Maximum Height
Software:
Software Universal
Universal Control,
Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
15.75 inches (400 mm)
Tutorials
Width (chassis only)
Technical
Information
16 inches (406.4 mm)
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
Length
Controls
Physical
159
9
9.2
PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
Technical Information
Block Diagram
16.0.2 Block Diagram
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
9.2
Input
Channel Meter
FireWire Return
Streams 1- 8
Input Channels 1-8
Gain
Mic -6 + 65 dB
Line -20 +20 dB
Overview
48V
Phase
Gate
Mic Input
Mic Pre
A/D INPUT BUFFER
Equalizer
Compressor
Limit
H.P.
Main Mix L
U
Main Mix R
+
A/D
-
Pan
36 - 465Hz .26 - 3.5kHz 1.4k - 18kHz
Line Input
Fat Channel
AFL
PFL
Hookup
FireWire Input
Streams 1-8
Aux Bus Output
Post Fat Ch.
Aux Bus Output
Post Gate
Post
Pre1/ Pre2
Aux 1
Level
Pan
-120 - +10 dB
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 4
FXA
FXB
Controls
Link Mode - Pan enabled
Input
Input Channels 9-12
FireWire Return
Streams 9-12
Gain
48V
Channel Meter
Mic -6 + 65 dB
Line -20 +20 dB
Phase
Mic Input
Mic Pre
Gate
A/D INPUT BUFFER
Equalizer
Compressor
Limit
+
-
Left (Mono)
Main Mix L
U
Main Mix R
Pan
36 - 465Hz .26 - 3.5kHz 1.4k - 18kHz
+
Right
-
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
H.P.
A/D
Fat Channel
Link
AFL
PFL
FireWire Input
Streams 9-12
Aux Bus Output
Post Fat Ch.
Aux Bus Output
Post Gate
Post
Pre1/ Pre2
Aux 1
Level
Pan
-120 - +10 dB
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 4
FXA
FXB
Link Mode - Pan enabled
Input
Connecting
to a
Computer
Input Channels 13-16
FireWire Return
Streams 13-16
Gain
48V
Mic Input
Channel Meter
Mic -6 + 65 dB
Line -20 +20 dB
Phase
Mic Pre
Gate
A/D INPUT BUFFER
Equalizer
Compressor
Limit
+
H.P.
Main Mix L
U
-
Left (Mono)
Main Mix R
A/D
Pan
+
36 - 465Hz .26 - 3.5kHz 1.4k - 18kHz
-
Software:
Software Universal
Universal Control,
Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Right
Fat Channel
Link
AFL
PFL
-120 - +10 dB
Left
Right
Aux Bus Output
Post Fat Ch.
Aux Bus Output
Post Gate
FireWire Input
Streams13-16
Pre1/ Pre2
Post
Aux 1
Level
-120 - +10 dB
Pan
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 4
FXA
FXB
Link Mode - Pan enabled
Gain
Tutorials
Mic -6 + 65 dB
TalkBack Level
TalkBack Mic to Aux Bus
-
(48V Always On)
+
Talkback Mic
-120 - +10 dB
Links to Output Dim Level
-14 dB
Technical
Information
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
160
Owner’s Manual
Technical Information
9
Block Diagram 9.2
Overview
Main Mix L
Main Mix R
Solo Bus L
Solo Bus R
Aux 1
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 4
EFX A
EFX B
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
Output
Channel Meters
13/14 & 15/16
Limit
BALANCE LINE DRIVERS
+
-
D/A
-
U
-
Equalizer
Left
Main Output
Right
+
Compressor
+
Gate
+
Output Level Attenution
0 to -40 dB
36 - 465Hz .26 - 3.5kHz 1.4k - 18kHz
Fat Channel
D/A OUTPUT BUFFER
Hookup
Cue Level
Solo Bus L
Solo Bus R
Mono Output Level
-120 - +10 dB
Mono Output
+
D/A OUTPUT BUFFER
FireWire Return Streams 1&2
Monitor Level
Left
-
Controls
+
D/A
Right
+
-120 - +10 dB
Control Room Output
Phones Level
-
Phones Output
+
D/A
-
-120 - +10 dB
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
+
Aux 1
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 4
TalkBack Mic to Aux Bus
Output
Aux 1
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 4
Gate
Compressor
Gate
Compressor
Gate
Gate
Aux 4
Aux 3
Equalizer
Compressor
Equalizer
Compressor
Channel Meters
7 - 11/12
Limit
Equalizer
Equalizer
Limit
Links to Output Dim Level
-14 dB
Limit
Limit
U
D/A OUTPUT BUFFER
30 - 555Hz 75 - 1.2kHz 380 - 5kHz 1.4k - 18kHz
-
Aux 2
Aux 1
30 - 555Hz 75 - 1.2kHz 380 - 5kHz 1.4k - 18kHz
Aux 1
Aux Out 1
Aux 2
Aux Out 2
Aux 3
Aux Out 3
Aux 4
Aux Out 4
Connecting
to a
Computer
+
30 - 555Hz 75 - 1.2kHz 380 - 5kHz 1.4k - 18kHz
-
.26 - 3.5kHz 1.4k - 18kHz
+
36 - 465Hz
D/A
FatFat
Channel
Channel
+
-
Compressor
Equalizer
Software:
Software Universal
Universal Control,
Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
+
Gate
Limit
Internal FX Processor
Level
36 - 465Hz .26 - 3.5kHz 1.4k - 18kHz
Fat Channel
EFX A
Compressor
Equalizer
Internal FX
Unit
Limit
Internal FX Processor
Level
36 - 465Hz .26 - 3.5kHz 1.4k - 18kHz
Main
Technical
Information
Fat Channel
EFX B
Aux
1-4
Aux 1
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 4
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
Gate
Aux 1
Aux 2
Aux 3
Aux 4
Tutorials
Aux
1-4
161
10 Troubleshooting & Warranty
10.1Troubleshooting
PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
10.0 Troubleshooting and Warranty
10.1
Troubleshooting
Overview
Many technical issues can arise when using a standard computer as a digital audio
workstation (DAW). PreSonus can only provide support for issues that directly
relate to the StudioLive interface, Capture™ audio-recording software, Studio One™
digital audio workstation software, Universal Control control-panel software, VSL™
mixer-control software, and StudioLive™ Remote software. PreSonus does not
provide support for computer hardware, operating systems, and non-PreSonus
hardware and software, and it may be necessary to contact the manufacturer of
these products for technical support. Please check our Web site (www.presonus.
com) regularly for software information and updates, firmware updates, and
support documentation for frequently asked questions. You can get individual
technical assistance by calling PreSonus at 225-216-7887, Monday through Friday,
between the hours of 9 a.m. and 5 p.m. Central Time. PreSonus technical support
is available via email during the same hours at [email protected].
Hookup
Controls
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
Pops and Clicks
Pops and clicks in your audio could be caused by momentary losses of
synchronization between the StudioLive and its clock source. This can be due to a
FireWire card that is not suited for FireWire audio devices or to a lack of CPU resources
or available memory. Try closing all unnecessary programs, increasing the buffer size
in the Universal Control console, and optimizing your operating system for audio.
Connecting
to a
Computer
Other known causes of this issue are wireless networks and running other FireWire
devices (Fire­Wire 400 or FireWire 800) in parallel to your StudioLive. Because of
this, it is recommended that PC users disable their wireless network from their
System Control Panel and Mac users turn AirPort off while the StudioLive is
connected to their computer. If disabling the wireless network on your computer’s
built-in wireless card resolves the issue, we recommended that you purchase an
external USB wireless adapter and use this to create a wireless network instead.
Software:
Software Universal
Universal Control,
Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
If other FireWire devices, such as external hard drives, need to be connected
to your computer at the same time, connect them to the auxiliary FireWire
port on the back of your StudioLive or install a dedicate FireWire bus on
your computer for either the StudioLive or your FireWire peripherals.
Recommended FireWire Chipsets
Tutorials
Technical
Information
The StudioLive will work with a wide range of FireWire cards and configurations.
However, due to the plethora of FireWire chipsets currently on the market, it is not
possible to thoroughly test each one for compatibility. Most users will not need to
alter their current PC configuration to use their StudioLive. The following FireWire
chipsets, however, have been tested and approved for use with the StudioLive:
•• Agere/LSI FW323-06
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
•• TI TSB43AB23
•• VIA VT6308
162
Owner’s Manual
Troubleshooting & Warranty 10
Troubleshooting10.1
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
•• VIA VT6306 (On some older motherboards, this chipset will only
support a limited number of playback channels: 32 channels
at 44.1 or 48 kHz; 16 channels at 88.2 or 96 kHz.)
Overview
•• As of the publication of this manual, PreSonus only
recommends the following Express cards:
•• ADS Pyro 1394a
Known Incompatible Hardware
Controls
ATI Radeon 9000/9001 IGP video chipset. Symptoms are consistent clicks
and pops during audio playback. This video chipset is only found in PC
laptops and is entirely integrated as the computer’s only video controller.
PreSonus strongly recommends that users do not purchase a system with
this chipset, as there is currently no workaround for this incompatibility.
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
SB/FireWire and s400/s800 combo cards. Symptoms usually include
U
no audio recording/playback, even though the device will install
and sync, as well as erratic audio performance. Rarely, combo cards
will prevent the device from installing or achieving a stable sync. We
recommend FireWire cards that have s400 FireWire connections only.
ireWire cards with NEC chipsets. Symptoms include installation
F
issues, erratic audio, and extraneous static and noise.
Software:
Software Universal
Universal Control,
Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
StudioLive Control Panel Will Not Launch
The StudioLive Control Panel will not launch if the StudioLive is not
connected and synced to your computer. Verify that your FireWire cable
is connected both to your computer and to your StudioLive. Navigate to
Page 3: Digital in the StudioLive System menu and verify that the Sample
Rate reads “FireWire”, the Link ID is set to 0, and the driver is On.
No Output on a Channel
Tutorials
Press the Input button in the Metering section and verify that there is signal on
that channel. If no signal is present, check the cable and the input source. If signal
is present, press the Select button for the channel in question. Make sure that the
channel is assigned to the main output in the Assign section of the Fat Channel.
Fader Movements Have No Effect on Audio
Verify that your StudioLive is not locked by navigating to Page 5: Lockout in the
System menu. Verify that your StudioLive is not in Fader Locate mode. Select Output
in the Metering section and verify that your fader movements are affecting the
output signal. If so, make sure your channels are assigned to the main outputs.
163
Technical
Information
Connecting
to a
Computer
otherboards with nForce4 chipsets. Symptoms include reduced or very
M
poor performance, especially if using the onboard FireWire connection.
Installing a PCIe (not PCI) FireWire 400-only card with an approved
chipset is a known workaround but may not allow full performance.
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
Hookup
•• StarTech EC13942
10 Troubleshooting & Warranty
10.2 PreSonus StudioLive 16.0.2 Limited Warranty
Quick Start:
Level
Setting
PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
No Internal Effects in the Main Bus
Overview
Make sure the assign to Mains button is enabled in the FX section.
Press the FXA or FXB button in the Encoder section and verify the
send levels of each channel. If the levels look adequate, use the FX
Output knob to increase the master level for the effects mix.
No Output on the Solo Bus While Monitoring
Hookup
Verify that both the Cue volume and the headphone, or monitor, volume
is at a reasonable level for comfortable listening. Make sure that you
only have Solo selected in the Monitor section of your StudioLive.
Controls
10.2
PreSonus StudioLive 16.0.2 Limited Warranty
Scenes, Presets, System Menu,
and MIDI Control
PreSonus Audio Electronics, Inc., warrants this product to be free of defects in
material and workmanship for a period of one year from the date of original retail
purchase. This warranty is enforceable only by the original retail purchaser. To be
protected by this warranty, the purchaser must complete and return the enclosed
warranty card within 14 days of purchase. During the warranty period PreSonus
shall, at its sole and absolute option, either repair or replace, free of charge, any
product that proves to be defective on inspection by PreSonus or its authorized
service representative. To obtain warranty service, the purchaser must first call or
write PreSonus at the address and telephone number printed below to obtain a
Return Authorization Number and instructions of where to return the unit for service.
All inquiries must be accompanied by a description of the problem. All authorized
returns must be sent to the PreSonus repair facility postage prepaid, insured, and
properly packaged. PreSonus reserves the right to update any unit returned for
repair. PreSonus reserves the right to change or improve the design of the product at
any time without prior notice. This warranty does not cover claims for damage due
to abuse, neglect, alteration, or attempted repair by unauthorized personnel and
is limited to failures arising during normal use that are due to defects in material or
workmanship in the product. Any implied warranties, including implied warranties
of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, are limited in duration to the
length of this limited warranty. Some states do not allow limitations on how long an
implied warranty lasts, so the above limitation may not apply to you. In no event will
PreSonus be liable for incidental, consequential, or other damages resulting from the
breach of any express or implied warranty, including, among other things, damage
to property, damage based on inconvenience or on loss of use of the product, and,
to the extent permitted by law, damages for personal injury. Some states do not
allow the exclusion of limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the
above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific
legal rights, and you may also have other rights, which vary from state to state. This
warranty only applies to products sold and used in the United States of America.
For warranty information in all other countries please refer to your local distributor.
Connecting
to a
Computer
Software:
Software Universal
Universal Control,
Control,
SL Remote, Capture,
and Studio One Artist
Tutorials
Technical
Information
PreSonus Audio Electronics, Inc.
7257 Florida Blvd.
Baton Rouge, LA 70806
Troubleshooting
and Warranty
164
Owner’s Manual
IndexA-L
Index
A
E
Ableton Live 62
Adjusting FX Parameters 37
AFL 34, 153
Arrow Tool 94, 99
Assigning FX
To Aux Bus 27
To Main Bus 27
Attack 135, 137
Audio Device
Capture 97
Studio One Artist 116
Audio I/O Set-up
Studio One Artist 120–121
AutoStore 42
Aux Mixing 28
Pre Fader Send Positions 46
Stereo Aux Mix 28
Edit Window 95
Equalizer 18–38
Definition 141
Graphic 44, 142
Parametric 141
Shelving 142
Eraser Tool 94, 101
Expansion
Definition 136
Export Audio 105
B
Backing Up StudioLive Library 72
Buffer Size (see also, Latency) 68
C
Changing FX Type 37
Clock Source 67
Compressor 17
Definition 134–135
Suggested Settings 139
Terminology Associated With 135
Control Change Messages 49
Copy 22
Creating a Capture Session 96
Creating a Monitor Mix 28, 149
Creating an FX Mix 28, 149
Cubase 61
D
Decay 151
Delay 152
Delay Time 37, 152
Dig Out 22, 63, 109
Downward Expansion 137
Dynamic Range 133
F
Fader Locate 24. See also Recalling Faders
FireWire Returns 30, 35, 63
Recording with Fat Channel Effects 65
FireWire Sends 63
Firmware Version 47, 68
Flexible Inputs 63
Frequency Tables 144–145
FX Bus 36
G
Gate 16, 134
GEQ 44
H
Hard knee 136
High Pass Filter 16
I
Import Audio
Capture 104
Studio One 125
K
Key Filter 137
Key Listen 137
L
LCD Contrast 46
Limiter 18, 135
Loading Presets
Fat Channel 42, 75
FX 36, 75
Graphic EQ 45, 75
Lockout Mode 47, 77
Logic 61
Loop 95, 103
165
M-ZIndex
M
Makeup Gain 136
Markers
Adding 95, 102, 110
Navigating 95, 102
Meter Bridge 94
Metering
Gain Reduction 24
Input Levels 23
Output Levels 24
MIDI Controller 117
MIDI Control Mode 48, 126
MIDI Sound Module 118
Monitoring 34, 34–35
MultiMode Button 25, 26, 30–31
Muting 31
FX in Mains 27
FX to Auxes 27
N
Noise Gate
Definition 137
O
Open TL Export 106
Overdubbing 111–112
P
Pan 21
PFL 33, 153
Phantom Power 9, 16, 25, 129
Phase Reverse 16
Plug-ins 64, 124
Predelay 151
Program Changes 48
Q
Q, Definition 141
R
Range 137
Range Tool 94, 100
Ratio 135, 137
Recalling Faders 24, 41
Recalling Groups 41
Record Enable
Capture 94, 98
Release 136, 137
Remote Control
MIDI Control Mode
Roland FC300 54
Studio One Artist 125
SL Remote app for iPad 78
166
Restoring StudioLive
To Factory Default 68
Using VSL 72
Reverb 151
S
Safe Modes 67
Sample Rate 67
Scenes
Backing up in VSL 70
Creating in VSL 71
Recalling 40, 74
Storing 39
Scribble Strip Labels 75
Select Buttons 15, 25, 26, 27
Setting Input Levels 98, 153
Sidechain 136
SIP 3, 30, 34, 154
Soft knee 136
Solo 30, 33–34, 35
Monitoring the Solo Bus 35
Solo In Place. See SIP
Sonar 62
Splice Tool 94, 101
Stereo Link 21
In Capture 94
Storing Presets
Fat Channel 22, 42
FX 37
Graphic EQ 45
Using VSL 70, 71
Sync 47
T
Talkback 32–33
Tap Tempo 37
Threshold 135, 137
Time X 37
Transport 95
U
Unity Gain 25, 26
Updating Firmware 68
V
Variable Feedback 152
Z
Zero Out (Board Reset) 39
Zooming 96, 102
167
PreSonus StudioLive™ 16.0.2
Declaration of
­Conformity
Responsible Party: PreSonus Audio Electronics
Address:
7257 Florida Blvd., Baton Rouge, LA
70806 USA
Phone: 1-225-216-7887
Declares that StudioLive™ 16.0.2 complies with
Part 15 of the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and;
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation
Note: No product support is available when you call the number above. Refer to
your Certificate of Warranty in your User Manual for PreSonus’ Technical Support
telephone number.
Baton Rouge • USA • www.presonus.com
168
Owner’s Manual
Added bonus: PreSonus’ previously Top Secret recipe for…
Jambalaya
Ingredients:
••
••
••
••
••
••
••
••
••
••
••
••
5 lbs link andouille sausage
3 lbs boneless chicken
2 lbs ground beef
3 lbs onions (yellow or purple)
2 stalks of celery
1 lb bell peppers (green or red)
1 batch green onions
3 lbs rice
Tony Chachere’s Cajun Seasoning
1 bottle chicken stock concentrate (or 3 cubes chicken bullion)
1 can Rotel tomatoes with chilies, diced (regular hot)
Tabasco sauce
Cooking Instructions:
1. In a 16 qt. pot or larger, slice link sausage and pan-fry until brown.
2. Add ground beef and brown.
3. Do not remove from pot Add diced onions, celery, and bell peppers,
1 can Rotel Original diced tomatoes w/chilies, 3 oz concentrate chicken stock,
½ teaspoon of Cajun seasoning, 1 teaspoon of Tabasco hot sauce
(or more…maybe lots more).
4. Cook until onions are translucent.
5. Add chicken and cook until it turns white.
6. Add diced green onions, 1 tsp. salt, ½ gallon water and bring to a boil.
7. Add rice and bring to a boil. Cook on high for 8 m
­ inutes, covered, stirring every 2 minutes
8. Cook covered on low for 10 minutes, stirring only once.
9. Turn off and let sit for 30 minutes.
10. Serve and enjoy!
Serves 20
© 2011 PreSonus Audio Electronics, Inc. All Rights Reserved. The following are trademarks or registered trademarks of PreSonus Audio Electronics, Inc., all rights reserved: AudioBox,
Capture, FireStudio, PreSonus, StudioLive, Studio One, and XMAX. Mac, Mac OS, and Macintosh are registered trademarks of Apple, Inc., in the U.S. and other countries. Windows is a
registered trademark of Microsoft, Inc., in the U.S. and other countries. Other product names mentioned herein may be trademarks of their respective companies. All specifications
subject to change without notice… except the jambalaya recipe, which is a classic.
StudioLive 16.0.2
™
Owner’s Manual
EMC Statement:
NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed
to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined
by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the
receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
CAUTION: Changes or modifications to this device not expressly
approved by PreSonus Audio Electronics could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment under FCC rules.
This apparatus does not exceed the Class A/Class B (whichever is applicable) limits
for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the radio interference
regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications.
ATTENTION — Le présent appareil numérique n’émet pas de bruits radioélectriques
dépassant las limites applicables aux appareils numériques de class A/de class B (selon
le cas) prescrites dans le réglement sur le brouillage radioélectrique édicté par les
ministere des communications
du Canada.
™
7257 Florida Boulevard
Baton Rouge, Louisiana 70806
USA • 1+ 225.216.7887
www.presonus.com
Part# 820-SL0002-B